JP2023156667A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase merchantability.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of performing control to an advantageous state performs a switching display for switching a reservation display to a correspondence display following a variation display start, performs a movement display for moving decorative identification information and a prior operation display as variation displays of decorative identification information, performs a prior operation display when a switching display is performed in a normal state, and can perform a common switching display on the basis of a first type of variable display pattern information and a second type of variable display pattern information. The game machine can display a crack sign image in a predetermined display layer, can display a fragment image in a specific display layer having high priority, and can display special information regarding a variable display in a special display layer having high priority. A predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack sign image and a second predetermined part for displaying multiple fragment images. In a specific performance, multiple fragment images start to be displayed in a short period. Execution timing differs between the predetermined performance and the specific performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 100

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by variably displaying specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variably displaying the specific identification information.

Some pachinko gaming machines, typified by gaming machines, display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) variably in response to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (for example, patents (See Reference 1). Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, as a step-up effect that changes the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device step by step, the display screen of the liquid crystal device is likened to glass, and the display screen has cracks (images that indicate cracks). There is a device that can perform an effect of displaying a plurality of broken images as if the display screen was broken after displaying a glass plate (for example, a glass plate) (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 Publication Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-127593

In the gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, there was room to improve the marketability.

The present invention was devised in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
Display means;
The game control means is
Performing variable display of the specific identification information based on multiple types of variable display patterns,
controllable into a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed in the corresponding display area,
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches a pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, a moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved, and a preliminary operation display in which the decorative identification information is operated in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display are performed. It is possible to
performing the preliminary operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
Performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means,
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the control will be in the advantageous state;
The display means is capable of displaying a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding the variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays the crack precursor image and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when the crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in the predetermined performance. can be,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed. Unlike,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is scrolled. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from scroll display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, by being able to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image at different timings, players can In addition, since the types of background images are different between before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, it is possible to create a surprise in the same effect in which the fragment image is displayed. It is possible to give a suitably different impression even when playing the game, and to increase the interest in the game. Therefore, marketability can be improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in Embodiment 1. FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure for explaining a decorative pattern and a small pattern. (A1) (A2) is the first production mode, (B1) (B2) is the second production mode, (C1) (C2) is the third production mode, (D1) (D2) is the fourth production mode. FIG. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in the first production mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second production mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative patterns in the third production mode, (D1 and D2) in the fourth production mode, and (E) is a diagram showing the variable display of decorative and small symbols. FIG. , (A) is a diagram showing a variation start action of a decorative pattern, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating an operation example of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 1st production mode. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 26. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 2nd production mode. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in FIG. 28; It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern as modification 1. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative designs following FIG. 31. It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern in a 3rd performance mode. It is a figure for explaining how a decorative pattern looks. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 4th production mode. It is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 36. FIG. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is three in the first production mode (second production mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth performance mode (third performance mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in a 1st production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second production mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the time of starting variable display in the first production mode, (B) in the second production mode, and (C) in the third production mode and the fourth production mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of customer waiting demonstration performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize occurs during the customer waiting demonstration performance. It is a figure which shows the flow of a pseudo consecutive notice. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive number display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive number display and the type of symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive number display color determination table. . It is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance following FIG. 50. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of each part in reach production. It is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of SP ready-to-reach performance following FIG. 53. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of each part in SP reach effect. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing modification example 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 3 of the present invention. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state or a variable probability state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing fluctuation categories. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a hold display performance and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed and the production pattern determination ratio in a normal state, and (C) is an explanation of the performance pattern. It is a diagram. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is executed and the production pattern determination ratio of the background change production, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the execution or non-execution of a reach suggestion production and the production pattern determination ratio, (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern determination ratio. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the time saving state and the variable probability state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 1st continuous crack effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 2nd continuous crack effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a dialogue preview performance. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of a part of operation example of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of weak development effect. It is a figure showing the details of a part of operation example of strong development production A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of cut-in effect|action. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating details of an operation example of a result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is a timing chart showing details of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. It is a timing chart showing details of dialogue preview production. 5 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect A. 7 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect B. FIG. It is a timing chart showing the details of a pseudo continuous performance. It is a timing chart showing the details of reach suggestion performance. It is a timing chart showing details of weak development performance. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance B. It is a timing chart showing details of cut-in performance. It is a timing chart showing details of result notification performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing speed change of a fragment image in each performance. It is a figure which shows the crack pattern in crack production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of each crack pattern. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern E. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a crack pattern G with a whiteout image and without a whiteout image. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a pseudo continuous effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in background change effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 4 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 5 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 6 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 7 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 8 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 10 of this invention.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
Type 1 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to variably display reduced identification information that is smaller in size than the decoration identification information and corresponds to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display (for example, a scroll display, see FIG. 21) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (for example, a switching display, see FIG. 22(E)) that switches to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched multiple times in a period until the one decoration identification information finishes displaying. is possible (for example, in a period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern ends, the small pattern is switched 5 times and the small pattern in the wrong combination is displayed for each period Ta1). (period Ta1 < period Ta2; see FIG. 22(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is configured by a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that in the variable display of the reduced identification information, the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 , when it is decided to stop displaying the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "326") of the missing combination, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "326") of the above-mentioned missing combination is displayed. Before stopping and displaying the ``326'' pattern, the display is switched so that the small pattern of the same combination of "326" as the decorative pattern is not displayed. (See Figure 22 (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the variable display of reduced identification information is displayed before the display result of the variable display of decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so that the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in Since the information that will be derived is not known in advance, it is possible to prevent a loss of interest.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
Type 2 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is composed of a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C). , the part where you can win or lose depending on the combination of decorative symbols such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is displayed as the valid display. When stopping in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 A part where a variable stop action can be executed when temporarily stopping a decorative pattern in the display (see Figures 36 to 38, Figures 42 and 43),
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see modification 3 of FIG. 57);
While the variable display of the decorative identification information is being performed, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a predetermined light emitting period is repeatedly performed, and the decorative identification information that is stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner. (For example, even when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable stop action when displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The part where the loop light emission control of the movable lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area is By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area, and even when a non-specific combination that originally has no meaning to the player is derived, the player's line of sight can be drawn. It can be pinned to the area where the decorative identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the decorative identification information that is stopped in the valid display area in an enlarged manner, the decorative identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner, so that the player's line of sight can be focused on the decorative identification information that is stopped in the valid display area. At the same time, the load on display control can be reduced. Moreover, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is displayed in an enlarged manner, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a front movement display (for example, a scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing transparency and is erased (see FIGS. 28 to 30). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, the other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the first decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 30 As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after it is displayed in the frame until it is displayed in the frame. Other decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the back side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character in the character display section 002SG052 with the symbol "3" is displayed, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), as shown in FIG. 30(C). The part where the number ("3") of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed after the decorative pattern "2" is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when performing front movement display in which decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information passes through the first decoration identification information and becomes visible, but at this time, the character image of the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numerical image of the other decorative identification information is displayed after the first decorative identification information is deleted, the numerical image of the first decorative identification information and the numerical image of the other decorative identification information are displayed overlapping each other. This prevents the numerical image of the first decorative identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, a scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 31 and 32). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification information becomes visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 31 As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so it is displayed in the frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from when the first decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed to the frame-out, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") located behind the first decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is "2") may pass through the decorative pattern "3" and become visible. At this time, while the characters in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" are displayed, the numbers ( "2") is a part that is difficult to see (or is not displayed). Modification example 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when performing front movement display in which decoration identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency and erased, other decoration identification information located on the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information passes through the decoration identification information 1 and becomes visible, but at this time, the character image of the decoration identification information 1 located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of the first decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is deleted, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the first decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. This prevents the numerical images of other decoration identification information located on the back side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
Type 5 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated and the front and back sides of the decoration identification information are repeatedly displayed (see FIGS. 33 and 34);
During the rotational display, the decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state, and when the rotational display stops, the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state (see FIGS. 33 and 34);
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information that is in a semi-transparent state during the rotational display is displayed, the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34);
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control continues even during the rotational display. (For example, even when variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the high base state, the order of white, blue, and yellow is displayed based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). A part where the light emitting pattern may be repeatedly executed. Modification example (see Fig. 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when rotating the decoration identification information and repeatedly displaying the front and back sides of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. However, in this case, while the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed, the number image on the back side is not displayed, so the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed. The image and the number image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, and it is possible to prevent the number image on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during rotational display, control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
Type 5 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between,
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion effect is executed. state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is changed to a second transparency lower in transparency than the first transparency (for example, second transmittance F2). (see Figure 52).
After execution of the reach line suggestion effect, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area ( For example, after execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set to be higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing at which the second transmittance F2, which has a low transmittance (transparency), is set is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is deleted from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes The decorative identification information suggests the reach line without interfering with the image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
Form 6 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
comprising a light emitting means;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between,
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
When executing the reach line suggestion effect, an enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. It is possible to execute (see Figures 50 to 52),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period from the start to the end of the enlarged display is longer). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the distance display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 52),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to perform light-off control to turn off the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 A part that turns off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (nearby). See FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for a first period, and then displayed at a distance for a second period that is longer than the first period, so that the decoration forming a reach state is displayed. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more clearly.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
Type 7 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
comprising a light emitting means;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The areas where the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, the left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between,
When the specific display result is derived, after the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, the decoration identification information that forms the reach state is The decoration identification information of the same type becomes a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) that stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, it is possible to execute a reach line suggestion effect that displays and erases a reach line effect display (002SG250) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a movable lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to perform light-off control to turn off the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 A part that turns off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (nearby). See FIGS. 50(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area. At the same time, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more clearly.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
Type 8 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed for a first period (for example, a display control for effect control). When the CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a low base state, a loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special pattern ends. (See FIG. 23(C), FIG. 42, FIG. 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed for a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 , A portion that repeatedly executes loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state. (see FIG. 24(B), FIG. 42, and FIG. 43),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern in the high base state in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C). , the part where the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed when temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of 5R (see Figure 44),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4; see FIG. 24(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to display the decorative identification information in a variable manner, while in a special state where variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is excessively performed. This will prevent you from feeling bothered by this. Moreover, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
Type 9 gaming machine is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, in the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and stores the pending storage number). the part that performs the updating process),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The part where you can win or lose depending on the combination of decorative patterns such as "326")
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When stopping information in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is enlarged from a normal size and then displayed in a manner that returns to the normal size according to the number of pending memories stored as the pending storage information. (For example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when displaying a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern. See FIGS. 36 to 39),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the valid display area, the storage information is stored as the suspended storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at the normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories) When a variable display based on a shortened variation pattern is executed, the variation stop action is not executed and the display is temporarily stopped while maintaining the size (see Figures 39 and 44)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the interest is improved by creating variations in the movement when the decorative identification information stops depending on the number of retained memories, while the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is visible. In special situations where it is difficult to do so, it is possible to stop the display while maintaining the size, so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The part where the transmittance (transparency) decreases and becomes faded),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) A portion that is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21. See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, basically, the shorter the fade-out display is executed, the more abruptly it appears to have disappeared, so it is possible that the variable display of decoration identification information and the background change are executed at the same time. In some cases, by executing the identification information fade-out display in a shorter period of time than the background fade-out display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display of the decorative identification information has started.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The part where the transmittance (transparency) decreases and becomes faded),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a part where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
The gaming machine of form 12 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The part where the transmittance (transparency) decreases and becomes faded),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is in the decorative pattern display area In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, the portion that is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed until the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See Figures 42 and 43)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that it appears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed, so it is possible that the variable display of decoration identification information and the background change are executed at the same time. In some cases, by performing the identification information fade-in display in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display, it is possible to draw attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
In the first production mode, multiple types of background images including the first background image and the second background image can be switched and displayed. The first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)) representing a landscape with a view of the surrounding area and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed. part),
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, performing a background fade-out display in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and erased, and a background fade-out display of the first background image. It is possible to perform a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually lowered while executing (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A). (See FIG. 40)
When starting variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the decorative identification information and erases it (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually lowered (for example, when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop timing When approaches, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C gradually decelerate in this order to become low-speed display, and are proportional to the decrease in speed. (The part where the transmittance (transparency) decreases and becomes faded),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, the part where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43) )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
The gaming machine of form 14 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect that restarts the variable display (for example, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is restarted after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed. , a part that can execute a "pseudo continuous notice" that incites whether or not to make one variable display appear to be pseudo variable display multiple times),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of multiple colors (for example, blue, red) including a numerical image,
When restarting the variable display in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo continuous number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display has been restarted can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red). (See Figures 48 and 49),
In the specific performance, the number image of the temporary stop-displayed decorative identification pattern and the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporary stop-displayed decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of colors is different, the number image of the temporarily stopped display of the decorative identification pattern and the number image of the number of times when the variable display is restarted, and the number of the number image of the temporarily stopped and displayed decoration identification pattern and the number of times. There are cases where both colors of the image are the same type of second combination,
In the specific performance, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted using the second combination than when the variable display is restarted using the first combination (for example, when the variable display is restarted using the second combination) In the continuous notice, the display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the case where the display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and the jackpot game state is more likely to occur when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive notice. (areas where the percentage of control is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the temporary stop display of the decoration identification information number image and the number image when it is executed. This improves the interest of the game.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
The gaming machine of form 15 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to variably display reduced identification information that is smaller in size than the decoration identification information and corresponds to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 the part that executes variable display of the design),
When variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demonstration designation command output from the main board 11, A part that can execute a "customer waiting demonstration performance" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 46),
While executing the standby effect, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 46);
If the variable display start condition is satisfied while executing the standby effect, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image becomes non-display, and then the predetermined image becomes non-display. After the decoration identification information is displayed, the variable display starts (for example, if a starting prize occurs while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden). The variable display of small symbols starts before the customer waits, and then the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the current performance mode (here, the background image corresponding to the first performance mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), a decorative pattern is displayed, and scrolling starts. See Figure 47)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started when the variable display start condition is met. However, since the variable display of the reduced identification information starts before the predetermined image becomes non-display, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
The gaming machine of form 16 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the normal state, when performing the switching display, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first reservation display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure reservation memory display area 5U) is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbol does not start until the pending shift display period until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed. , the part where the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 26(C) to 26(F)),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the performance control process processing in step S76). (a part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By displaying a preliminary operation that operates in a manner different from that displayed, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the switching display. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the preliminary operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display ends (for example, the left The first pending display 002SG101, which had been displayed in the first display area, is moved to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbols are scrolled ( 26 (C) - (F )reference),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the performance control process processing in step S76). (a part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By performing a pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information starts before the corresponding display is displayed. The discomfort caused by this can be eliminated. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the special state, when performing the switching display, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first reservation display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure reservation memory display area 5U) is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative symbol does not start until the pending shift display period until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is not executed. , The part where the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the pending shift display period ends. Modified example),
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control process in step S76). (The part that executes the variable display of decorative patterns based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during processing)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, A part that executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the reach variation pattern specification command). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By displaying a preliminary operation that operates in a manner different from that displayed, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the switching display. Further, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to make the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state more exciting. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the performance control process processing of step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not started yet (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the first in the special figure pending storage display area 5U in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can display the display in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161). The part that performs the process of displaying active display 002SG103),
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the production control CPU 120 may A part that performs a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved (for example, a scroll display; see FIG. 21), and a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed before starting the moving display, which is different from the moving display. It is possible to display a preliminary action (for example, a fluctuation start action, see FIG. 23(A)) to be operated in
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the preliminary operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display ends (for example, when the left side in the special figure hold storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101, which had been displayed in the first display area, is moved to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbols are scrolled ( The part where the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start, but the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed and the pending shift display period ends. Modification example)
Variable display of the decoration identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control process in step S76). (The part that executes the variable display of decorative patterns based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during processing)

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display based on a first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, , a reach variation pattern designation command), a part that executes a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. (See Figure 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is performed, the decorative identification information is moved. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information starts before the corresponding display is displayed. The discomfort caused by this can be eliminated. Further, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to make the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state more exciting. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of performance modes (for example, first performance mode to fourth performance mode) including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that is displayed fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20 (A1) and (A2)),
In the second performance mode, a special variable display that is different from the moving display is performed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20 (B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode ( For example, the part where the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) and (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only the mode of variable display of decoration identification information is different from that in the first presentation mode, but also the fade-out from the start of variable display until the decoration identification information is deleted. Since the display period becomes longer, attention can be drawn to the decoration identification information for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of performance modes (for example, first performance mode to fourth performance mode) including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decorative pattern gradually accelerates after the scroll display starts). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part that is displayed fades out),
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first production mode or the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second production mode (for example, in the first production mode). The fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different depending on the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode and the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode. )(See B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution period of the fade-out when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined is different depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is determined depending on whether the predetermined variable display pattern is controlled in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the game becomes more interesting.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative information in the effect control process processing in step S76). the part that executes variable display of the design),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. (For example, the variable display period of special symbols includes a variable pre-display period from the start of the variable display of special and small symbols until the start of the scrolling display of decorative symbols, and the scrolling display period of decorative symbols. a variable post-indication period after the start of the
The character image is displayed in the variable pre-display period and the variable post-display period,
After the related information image is displayed in the variable pre-display period, it is erased before the variable post-display period starts (for example, the name of the character (character Related information) is displayed during the variable pre-display period, that is, when the fluctuation start action is executed, and before the variable post-display period starts, that is, when the scroll display of the decorative pattern starts. The part to be erased before (see Figure 23(A) and Figure 26)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information starts, that is, when the display is stopped. Further, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control is performed to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). possible (for example, 1st production mode to 4th production mode, see Figure 20),
In the special state, control is possible to a production mode including a third production mode (for example, a third production mode or a fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first production mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26);
In the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner that does not include the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first production mode, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image by displaying the related information image, while in the second production mode and In the 3 effect mode, by erasing the related information image, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
By executing a variable display of specific identification information (for example, a special symbol) and deriving a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, an advantageous state advantageous to the player ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The game control means is
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing in step S25),
A normal state (for example, a low-accuracy low-base state), and a special state (for example, a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter; can be controlled to
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display section 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot). the part where the performance can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display where the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. (For example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is tentatively displayed. It is stopped and displayed (see Figure 53(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is being displayed, the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. (The part where the combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily)
A specific image (for example, specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 53 (H) and (I)), in the high base state, a flame is emitted to the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbol combination that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect. Part where the specific image 002SG075 shown is not displayed (see FIGS. 54(P) and (S)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the average variable display period is short even though the performance effect is enhanced and livened up by displaying a specific image in response to the numerical image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification performance. In the special state, by not displaying the specific image in response to the numerical image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The performance control means is
Based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, erase the corresponding display (for example, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, active display area 5F). When the corresponding display is erased, an erase effect display (for example, erase effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the pending display is displayed when the clearing effect display is displayed, the clearing effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is started (for example, the clearing effect 002SG110 is It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and disappears after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. (See Figure 25 (B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period of the performance between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from decreasing. In addition, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the player also recognizes that a new variable display has started by displaying a new corresponding display. can be done.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed include a first area (for example, left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (for example, right decorative pattern display area 5R), and the first area and the second area. a third area (for example, center decoration pattern display area 5C) located between the
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (for example, see FIG. 19);
In the special state, the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area, and the third area are displayed in the same size (for example, see FIG. 19);
The third area in the special state is located closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (for example, see FIG. 19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decoration identification information in the first area and the second area are made to look larger, and the decoration identification information in the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and improve interest. However, in a special state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position close to the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be improved.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

Next, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," "Normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are displayed numbers corresponding to a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decorative pattern. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. The notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20), the remaining time saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20), which shows the number of remaining time savings, etc., are displayed in front (upper layer) of the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While this prevents the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error displays from being reduced due to duplication, decorative symbols are stored on the back side (lower layer) of the production image. By displaying the decorative patterns, it may be possible to prevent the decorative patterns from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the effect image.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect is performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, and the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 or Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a part of the decorative pattern is obscured, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being displayed in a variable manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in FIG. 1, above and below the image display device 5), movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided that operate according to the performance. Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The lighting and extinguishing of the lights, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or any performance device including some or all of these may be performed.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, since the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, the images of each of these layers are drawn and displayed in the VRAM area. a layered image drawing area for placement; a display image creation area for further superimposing (synthesizing) the images drawn and placed in each layered image drawing area to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5; is located. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area includes a special figure holding memory display area 5U that specifiably displays the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number at the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. At the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, there is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decorative pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decoration pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so it is displayed as a middle layer in the image display device 5. The image (background image) that is displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has the lowest display priority and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or a drive circuit that drives the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

In addition, audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for performance control. It may also be executed by the CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which both time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state). Note that the variable probability state with time saving may be simply referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo series), super reach (one pseudo series), and super reach (two pseudo series). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot. Variable display results as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (1 pseudo-run), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a loss (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is changed to PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -1 (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. ), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous effect 2) (times) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 are determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 are determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is one or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure. Using the variation pattern determination table A, change the variation pattern to PA1-1 (variation pattern with no shortening, non-reach error), PA2-1 (normal reach error), and PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)), and PA2-4 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or variable probability state), select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 (shortened PA2-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern) pattern) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The selection ratio of any of the variable patterns for jackpots (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, depending on the gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variable pattern suitable for the gaming state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 002SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 002SG151B allows execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 002SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game balls with the pending numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the common figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 002SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has a performance control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 002SG191, a performance control timer setting section 002SG192, a performance control counter setting section 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 002SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting unit 002SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 002SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 002SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 002SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of pending memories of the second special figure pending memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 002SG194A are associated with these starting opening winning designation commands and pending memory number notification commands. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is performed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101;Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (002SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 002SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 002SGS102 (002SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (002SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 002SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 002SGS105 (002SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the starting opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 sends information to the production control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command (002SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 002 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value by subtracting 1, etc. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 002SGS144), the process moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 002SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 002 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 002SGS148), the process moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state in this feature), if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be a "jackpot". ”, and if it is not applicable, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 002SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “big hit” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C", it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is selected (step 002 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 002 SGS 154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 002SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing of step 002SGS155, the process advances to step 002SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), the process in step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 responds to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot gaming state. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 002SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B are controlled to operate various production devices. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode are and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode are selectively displayed. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the third background image can be displayed when the gaming state is the low probability high base state. 4 background images can be displayed when the gaming state is a high probability high base state. Furthermore, switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when a variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one background image is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is designed to switch when a condition is met.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and in addition, in a state where the menu screen is displayed, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration performance may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the pending storage display (first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102) in the special figure pending storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process is executed to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the display according to the storage contents of the winning command reception command buffer 002SG194A (step S161). After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, a determination is made to execute a pre-read preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display color of the pending display, etc.). A prefetch notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output sounds and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). ) performs various effect controls during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer is "1-0" to "1-4". The various command data and various flags stored in association with " are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the received command buffer at the time of start winning are stored in the buffer number 1. It is shifted upward one by one (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is a fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120, for example, selects a combination of decorative symbols with an even number of three symbols as the stop symbols. Determine.

In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a non-probable variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the 3rd variable display result that corresponds to a probability variable jackpot B to a probability variable jackpot C. As with the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999") can be used as the stop symbol. A case may also be provided in which the selection is made from among a combination of decorative patterns such as ``. In this case, by making the performance during the jackpot game or the variable display in the variable probability state more common, it is possible to determine whether the gaming state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether the time-saving state ends after 100 variable displays or continues until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for super reach (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-links. It is determined whether there is one (Step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a super reach variation pattern designation command, that is, if it is a normal reach variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS278; N), the process advances to step 002SGS383.

If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach fluctuation pattern designation command, the reach The display color of the stop symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and right ornamental symbol display area 5C that form the state is specified. Then, using the pseudo continuous number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo continuous number display (for example, "x2") indicating that two variable displays are to be started is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo-runs (step 002SGS279), and if it is determined to be a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo-runs. (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo continuous number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo continuous number display (for example, "x3") indicating that three variable displays including the first variable display will be started is determined and stored (step 002SGS280).

If it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not a two-time pseudo series, or if the process in step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo series (step 002SGS281). , proceed to step 002 SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern and small pattern on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be explained based on FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. In Figure 20, (A1) (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) (D2) are the fourth production mode. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a mode. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative symbols in (A1) and (A2) the first production mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second production mode. 22, (C1) (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative patterns in the third production mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and decorative patterns in the fourth production mode, and (E) is a diagram showing the decorative patterns and small patterns. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 19, the sizes of the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols are the same as when displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. Displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the gaming state is the low base state are circular number pedestals and A number display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal section, and 10 types of characters ( A character display section 002SG052 (all characters not shown) are displayed, an information pedestal section having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and information regarding the characters displayed on the front of the information pedestal section (for example, in this embodiment, , character name); and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. Ru.

In this embodiment, the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed on the information display section 002SG053, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items owned by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R (for the high base state) are number display parts consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061, and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the numeral display section 002SG061. The decorative pattern for the high base state is not provided with a character display section and an information display section like the decorative pattern for the low base state.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

Next, the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols will be explained.

<Display timing of each symbol> The decorative symbol (for low base state) and the decorative symbol (for high base state) are approximately displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the period when the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (hidden), for example, when SP reach performance (super reach performance) is performed during variable display or when customer waiting demonstration performance is performed. On the other hand, the small designs are always displayed in front of the decorative designs (upper layer) while the power of the image display device 5 is on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative designs are erased as described above. Is displayed. Note that when information having a higher display priority than the small symbol (for example, an error display) is displayed, it may be deleted.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> Decorative symbols (for low base state) are displayed in a scrolling manner that moves linearly from the top to the bottom of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. A variable display is executed in the second performance mode, and a variable display is executed in a scroll display that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side.

The decorative symbols (for the high base state) are variablely displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third presentation mode to be described later, in a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. , In the fourth performance mode, a variable display is performed in a scroll display that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom.

The small symbols can be displayed variably in the switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols "0" to "9" are switched in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, regardless of the game state or production mode. executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned "scroll display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display" in which the symbols are switched and displayed, but as described later, they are displayed in a frame-in or fade-in display in the display area. A "scroll display" is a display in which multiple symbols are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fading-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the symbols. A display in which a plurality of symbols are updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without displaying a fade-out display may be distinguished from a "switch display".

<Number display section> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have not only number display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054. On the other hand, the small design consists only of a number display section.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and are displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. By displaying the size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged linearly in the left-right direction. The small symbols are displayed in the same size in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the vertical center position of the image display device 5, but the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C is arranged at a position slightly above the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5R. In the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the middle ornament symbol display area 5C in the high base state are more easily displayed on the image display device than the ornamental symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the inner ornament symbol display area 5C in the low base state. 5 (see FIG. 20).

Also, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is taken as a reference, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative symbol (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small symbol is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display section is larger in the order of decorative symbols (for high base state), decorative symbols (for low base state), and small symbols (size of number display section: decorative symbol (for high base state) > decorative symbol (For low base condition) > Small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each symbol has the same relationship as that of the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to look larger, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decorative pattern is placed close to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decorative pattern can be improved. (See Figure 20).

Further, the number display portions of the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the small pattern are each formed by a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created with 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, information is given to reproduce the material etc. on each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object from arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but three-dimensional display devices (e.g., images for the right eye (R image) and images for the left eye (L image)) An image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video); a backlight that emits planar light from the back of the image liquid crystal panel toward the front; and a backlight that emits planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel toward the front side; An image that can be viewed three-dimensionally by displaying it on a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel provided at a predetermined interval may also be used.

In addition, among the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative pattern, odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are "probable variable jackpots" that are controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot ends. For the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", it is a regular symbol (non-probable variable) corresponding to "non-probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot. pattern). Incidentally, even in the case of a probability-variable jackpot, it may be arranged so that the jackpot combination is predetermined by the normal symbols.

<Character display section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, as will be described later, the characters displayed on the character display section 002SG052 perform predetermined actions (movements) when variable display starts or stops. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) and the small symbols are not provided with a character display section.

<Information display section> The information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display section 002SG053 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). In addition, the information display section 002SG053 displays a "name" that is information about the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052, and as described later, the "name" is erased at the start of variable display. It has become. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) and the small symbols are not provided with an information display section.

<Pedestal display section> The pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed from a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Furthermore, the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for the high base state) is formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the pedestal display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D images, three-dimensional images). Furthermore, when the size of the pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for the low base state) is taken as a reference, the size of the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display section.

<Main color> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051, 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "blue" for odd numbers. The variable pattern is said to be ``red''. Note that the pedestals for numbers other than numbers, the pedestal display parts 002SG054, 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color from the numbers.

Furthermore, the characters displayed on the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main colors. Further, as the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol, for example, when the ally character and the enemy character are separated, it is preferable to use the ally character. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character be the main character of the story, such as the main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as mentioned above, when adapting the story concept of allies and enemies, the preview performance and SP reach performance are basically expressed from the ally's perspective, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach performance. In this case, if the result is advantageous for the ally, such as when the ally wins over the enemy, the player is notified of an advantageous situation (for example, a jackpot).

Further, the main color having the highest occupancy rate over the entire area of each of the decorative symbol (for low base state) and the decorative symbol (for high base state) may be composed of the same type of color as the number. Moreover, although the regular symbols made up of even numbers are "blue" and the variable probability symbols made up of odd numbers are "red," they may be of other colors.

In addition, in the high base state, since the scroll display is performed at high speed as described later, it is necessary to make the appeal easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so it is necessary to display stop symbol notices, fluctuation start notices, etc. Because it is often executed by intertwining effect display with the symbol, the decorative symbol (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of the character display section and the number display section. It is characterized by a larger size ratio of the design than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustrations are omitted in this embodiment, the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the high base state) are designed to make the movement more complicated or the design better than the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the low base state). You may also try to liven up the high base state by making it look more flashy, such as by making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is ``yellow'' for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and ``yellow-green'' for variable patterns consisting of odd numbers. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbols made of even numbers are "yellow" and the variable probability symbols made of odd numbers are "yellow-green," but they may be of other colors. Further, the same numbers as the decorative pattern may have the same color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to display the numerical material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state by reducing it as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the production effect. In order to improve visibility for players, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and the color is simple without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 20, the performance control CPU 120 has a first performance mode (see FIGS. 20(A1) and (A2)), a second performance mode (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)), and a second performance mode (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)) as performance modes. It is possible to execute either the third effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (C1) and (C2)) and the fourth effect mode (see FIGS. 20 (D1) and (D2)). The first performance mode and the second performance mode are performance modes that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state. Further, the third production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability high base state, and the fourth production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state. This is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A1), in the first production mode, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the daytime city scenery is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The first background image 002SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a straight line downward. The frame is displayed downward from the lower side of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen. However, after the preceding decorative pattern of "3" passes the stop position, the preceding decorative pattern of "3" and the subsequent decorative pattern of "4" become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and small symbols are displayed, and the special symbol provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the pending memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F, a first pending display 002SG101 and a second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so their explanation will be omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 20 (B1), in the second production mode, decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The displayed second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (B2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative symbols approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. It is displayed in the frame as shown below, and then moves downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and laterally from the lower left side of the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative symbol display area 5R. Appears out of frame. The inner decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the inner decorative pattern display area 5C, and then displayed in a frame-out manner.

Further, the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Sometimes, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), when the preceding "2" decorative symbol is passing near the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the following "3" decorative symbol are However, after the preceding "2" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 20 (C1), in the third production mode, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the evening city scenery is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The third background image 002SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(C1) and (C2), the decorative pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b which is the opposite surface to the first surface 5a. , a preceding decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. That is, since the pedestal display section 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and in the order of the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, etc. By rotating, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and continues from "0" to "9". The updated display is performed repeatedly. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the first surface 5a faces the front, the second surface 5b has a first A decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) subsequent to the decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) displayed on the surface 5a is displayed. Next, although not particularly illustrated, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating approximately 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces forward, the first surface 5a has a portion that is displayed on the second surface 5b. The subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "5") following the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") is displayed.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. At the lower left corner, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (D1), in the fourth production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a night city scene is displayed as the background image of the decorative symbol. The fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of decorative patterns is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a straight line downward. The frame is displayed downward from the lower side of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, as shown in Figure 22 (D1), when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promotion of right-handed hitting operations.

In addition, in the second performance mode, the name of the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. Further, in the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a manner that does not include the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first performance mode, the player can deepen their understanding of the character by drawing attention to the character's name by displaying the information display section 002SG053. By keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden in the production mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview production, etc. rather than the characters. Note that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), the decorative pattern and the small pattern have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is displayed in the frame from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and passes through before being displayed in the frame from the lower side. A period Ta2 is required. That is, a period Ta2 is required until one decorative pattern is displayed and the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed by being switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times, etc.) in the above period Ta2.

For details, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30FPS (images are displayed at 30 frames per second), from the time the first decorative pattern starts to display until the display ends. 10 frames of images are displayed, and the period Ta2 is approximately 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, as for the small symbols, different combinations of small symbols (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when the first decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern ends, the small patterns are switched five times and are displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1< Period Ta2). Although the small symbols of each out-of-place combination are displayed for a period of time Ta1, it is difficult to confirm visually because it is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds).

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying a fixed decorative symbol of a losing combination (for example, "326") based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is determined to be a missed display result. In this case, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "326") of the above-mentioned outlying combination, the small pattern of the outgoing combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switch the display as follows. Therefore, it is prevented that it is known in advance that a decorative pattern of an incorrect combination will be stopped and displayed from a small pattern of an incorrect combination.

In addition, in the scrolling display in the first production mode, the second production mode, and the fourth production mode, and in the rotation display in the third production mode, the decorative design changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, While the variable display speed changes from high to low when the variable display stops, small symbols are now displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops. ing.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decorative symbols will be explained based on FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative pattern fluctuation start action, (B) a fluctuation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state may be moved within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in order to be displayed variably. It rotates within areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display section 002SG051 and character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern. .

(Fluctuation start action)
As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the variable display starts in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, in the decorative pattern, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 has its body direction reversed horizontally. ``Fluctuation start action'' is executed. Specifically, in the fluctuation start action A1, the character is placed in a normal mode with both hands on the waist and facing diagonally to the right, and in the fluctuation start action A2, the character is set in a mode in which the character raises both hands upward and spreads them out and faces forward. In action A3, the character places his hands on his hips and faces diagonally forward to the left. For convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation start action A1, A2, and A3 are displayed here, but in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the fluctuation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the character's body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body direction is diagonally forward to the left, the decorative pattern moves (rises) a predetermined distance from the stop position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then starts moving downward. Scroll display starts. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are the fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 24) from when the variable display of the special symbol starts until when the scroll display of the decorative symbol (downward movement of the decorative symbol) starts. It is carried out over a period of time.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only the states of four frames of fluctuation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed, but in reality, during the fluctuation start action period Tb1 until the direction of the character's body is reversed, several frames are displayed. A variation start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's motion for ten frames.

In this embodiment, as a variation start action, a mode in which the direction of the character's body is reversed horizontally is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action may be It is possible to change the character to a mode other than the above, for example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming the decorative pattern takes an action. In other words, the fluctuation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scroll display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scroll display. be.

Further, in the first performance mode, the character name (character related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the fluctuation start action period Tb1. In this way, while the character name is made easier to see when the character is stopped and displayed, the character name is hidden after the scroll display has started, thereby drawing attention to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbol includes a pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and small symbol until the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbol, and a period before the variable display of the decorative symbol. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The character name (character related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is executed, and then the post-variable display period starts. , that is, before the scroll display of the decorative pattern starts. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, preview effect, etc. rather than the name.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols until the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is taken as the variable pre-display period. The pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display start conditions are met until the variable display of decorative symbols starts, that is, the period when the starting winning occurs and the pending memory. The period may be any period from the start of the variable display based on the base to the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern.

(Fluctuating stop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(B), when the variable display ends in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display section 002SG052. A "fluctuating stop action" is executed in which the character being displayed is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode in which the character puts his hands on his hips and faces diagonally to the right (fluctuating stop action B1), to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude significantly upward from the pedestal display section 002SG054 (fluctuation stop action B2), the display is reduced and restored to the normal state (fluctuation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only the states of three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are displayed, but in reality, during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2 from when the character is enlarged until the character is restored, several frames are displayed. A variable stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's motion over ten frames.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode in which a character is displayed in an enlarged manner is illustrated as an example of the variation stop action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation stop action may be performed in a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Alternatively, at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming a decorative pattern may take an action. In other words, the variable stop action is an action that is executed when the scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed as a temporary stop, and is an action that is different from an action that changes like a scroll display or a rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 23(C), when the variable display ends in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped displayed until it is stopped and displayed (determined pattern)), the decorative pattern Then, a "loop action" is executed in which the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 repeats shrinking and restoring, and the number display section 002SG051 repeats horizontal rotation about the rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction.

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character places both hands on the waist and faces diagonally to the right, and the number display section 002SG051 faces the front in a normal mode, and in the loop action C2, the character moves to the pedestal display section 002SG054. At the same time, the number display section 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right, and in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, and the number display section 002SG051 is displayed in front. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so as to fit in the pedestal display section 002SG054, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over a loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is executed again, and the loop actions C1 to C4 are performed again over a loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

For convenience of explanation, only four frames of loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. In the loop action period Tb3 up to this point, a loop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character and number display section 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display section 002SG051 rotates as a loop action is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above, for example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the character's body may move. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and pedestal display section 002SG054 forming the decorative pattern takes an action. In other words, the loop action is an action that is executed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (the pattern is confirmed), and is an action that is different from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emitting periods)
Next, various actions of the decorative pattern and light emission control of the lamp will be explained based on FIG. 24. In FIG. 24, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 24(A), the variation start action period Tb1, which is the execution period, of the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 23(A)) of the decorative symbols is approximately 1.5 seconds (the variation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds) and consists of approximately 45 frames of images. In addition, the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, which is the execution period, of the fluctuation stop actions B1 to B3 of the decorative symbols (see FIG. 23(B)) is approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds). ), consisting of approximately 28 frames of images. In addition, in the loop actions C1 to C4 of the decorative patterns (see FIG. 23(C)), the loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, is approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), It consists of approximately 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(B), a movable body lamp 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, the light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow" over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is one cycle, and after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, the light returns to "white" and the loop light is emitted again. During period Tb4, light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", and this is periodically repeated. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is periodically executed.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, while in the high base state, where variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. This can prevent variable display from being excessively promoted and causing users to feel bothered. Moreover, since the loop action is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can suitably stand out.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified in which "white", "blue", and "yellow" light is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, after emitting light in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", A light emitting pattern in which light is emitted in sequence may be performed periodically, or a light emitting pattern in which four or more colors of light are emitted in order may be performed periodically.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the performance mode is the first performance mode or the second performance mode, but It is not executed when the performance mode is controlled to be in the high base state and the performance mode is the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode. Further, in the loop light emission control of the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 24(B), the gaming state is controlled to the low base state and the production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. However, it is not executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high base state and the performance mode is the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be explained based on FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A1), when the game is on standby (the number of pending memories is "0"), the special figure pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 are , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure pending memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning, and the second display area from the left The areas correspond to buffer numbers "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer numbers "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer numbers "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when a starting winning (for example, the first starting winning) occurs during game standby, a first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure holding memory display area 5U. is displayed. Next, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 25 (A3)), and then moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F in a parabolic manner. However, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (A2), at the time when a starting prize occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U, and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning When the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , the variable display of the small symbols is started in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is not active. The display has not been switched to active display 002SG103 after moving to area 5F, that is, the shift display has not finished. It is difficult to tell whether the scroll display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 has started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols starts after the pending shift display period ends. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (B1), when a decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of pending memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of pending memories is "2"), the image display device In the special figure holding memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. has been done.

As shown in FIG. 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to active display 002SG103 displayed in active display area 5F ends, active display 002SG103 displayed in active display area 5F is erased, and the corresponding A deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

In addition, the deletion effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is deleted, and as shown below, the next variable corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left The display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the performance between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from decreasing. Further, while the erasure effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to start a new variable display. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 25 (B3)), move diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F as if drawing a parabola, and move from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, as active display 002SG103. The display is switched (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left horizontally moves toward the left as the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left moves. (see FIG. 25 (B3)) and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased with the end of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the first display area from the left Although the 1st pending display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, when the moving display of the 1st pending display 002SG101 starts, the variable display of the small symbols will start in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U is not active. Since the movement to area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of decorative symbols starts in this state, it will not be possible to know which first pending display 002SG101 the scroll display has started. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the hold shift display period until the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103. Until the end of the period, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols starts, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is executed after the pending shift display period ends. It is about to start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F have a common aspect in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure holding storage display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to perform shift display in a mode corresponding to the production mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, the production control CPU 120 operates in a manner common to multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) A shift display is performed in which the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 are switched to the active display 002SG103 in a mode in which the hold display moves in a mountainous trajectory up to the display area 5F, but it is compatible with each variation pattern and each production mode. It may also be possible to perform shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Furthermore, it may be possible to perform a shift display that has different operating modes depending on whether the gaming state is a low base state or a high base state.

In addition, the operation mode that is common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of multiple factors such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those with common elements.

In this embodiment, with the occurrence of a starting prize, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is moved and displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special drawing pending memory display area 5U due to the occurrence of a starting prize, and the active display is The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the first pending display 002SG101 is used as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the display is moved non-linearly (for example, in a mountain pattern) from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed moving linearly toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only the one that slides the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending memory display area 5U. The first pending display 002SG101 that has been displayed may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on FIGS. 26 to 35. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first production mode. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second performance mode. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 28. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in FIG. 28. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flow of variable display of decorative patterns as Modification 1. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 31. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third production mode. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern looks. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth production mode.

In addition, in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams with lines other than solid lines (for example, one-dot chain lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are not displayed on the display screen. This is not a representation of the image that was created, but is provided to explain the movement of the image.

(Example of operation of variable display in first production mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 26 and 27.

FIG. 26(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at a stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, The decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 26(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 26(B) continues for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 26(E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and when the upward movement (action A4) is completed, the downward movement is started and scrolling is performed, as shown in FIG. 26(F). Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the ascending action A4 is started, and the ascending movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(G), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are completed, the ascending action A4 is started, and the ascending movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(H), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of operation of variable display in second production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the second performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 28 and 29.

FIG. 28(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the second performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). In addition, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative symbol is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, while the variable display of the small symbol starts, The decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 28(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the deletion effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 28(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 28(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back of the display screen (action A4) is completed, it moves forward as shown in FIG. 28(F). begins to move and scroll display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(G), forward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(H), forward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28(F) and 28(G), the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, and after reaching a medium speed shown in FIG. 28(H), The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display in the second effect mode is configured to move and disappear from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30(A) and 30(B), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side, so the decorative pattern display area 5L, From the time it is displayed in the frame to 5C and 5R until the time it is displayed in the frame, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located so that it partially overlaps with the other A decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may be visible through the decorative pattern "2". At this time, while the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 30(C). As shown, after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") in the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located on the back side of the first decorative pattern "2" becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "2", but in this case, the other decorative pattern "3" located on the back side For the other decorative pattern "3", the character in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, but the number in the number display section 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number in the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, so the number ``2'' of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern ``3'' are not displayed overlapping, and the ``2'' of the decorative pattern located on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from being put away.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the decorative pattern is displayed in a frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then displayed in a frame-out as shown in FIG. 30(C). The pattern is moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency) until it is displayed, but at the start of variable display, the decorative pattern is moved in proportion to the increase in display speed, as described above. Since the display is designed to fade out, the display fades out depending on the display speed and is moved from the back of the screen to the front of the screen while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, the screen appears at the back of the screen. Even on the side, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the decorative design.

(Example of operation of variable display as modification 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns starts as Modification 1 will be described based on FIGS. 31 and 32. In this modification example 1, the decorative patterns are scrolled in a curved manner as in the second production mode, but they move from the side opposite to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side. There is.

The flow in FIGS. 31(A) to 31(D) is the same as that in FIGS. 28(A) to 28(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 31(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F ends, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbol are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and when the forward movement toward the front of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the backward movement is started. begins to move and scroll display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(G), backward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(H), backward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed starts in the order of the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the middle ornamental symbol display area, but the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the action to start the variation is performed, so the player does not know that the variable display has started. can be recognized.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display. As the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move and erase from the front side of the screen toward the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so the decorative pattern display area 5L, During the period from being displayed in the frame to 5C and 5R until being displayed in the frame, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located so that it partially overlaps with the other A decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, while the character of the decorative pattern "2" in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, the number ("2") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the first decorative pattern "3" becomes visible through the first decorative pattern "3", but in this case, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side For the other decorative pattern "2", the character in the character display section 002SG052 is displayed, but the number in the number display section 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number in the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, so the number ``3'' of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern ``2'' are not displayed overlapping, and the ``3'' of the decorative pattern located on the front side is difficult to understand. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in this modification example 1, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until it is displayed in the frame, the decorative pattern moves and disappears while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative design is designed to fade out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so the display fades out in proportion to the display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display, it looks as shown in Figures 31 (F) to 31 (H), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, the screen appears at the back of the screen. Even on the side, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the decorative design.

(Example of operation of variable display in 3rd production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third production mode will be described based on FIGS. 33 and 34.

FIG. 33(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that have been rotated and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hand hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the nearer side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts; Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 33(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 33(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 33(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 33(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Rotation display of the decorative pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R The rotational display of 002SG101, which is displayed in the first display area from the left, moves to the active display area 5F until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 is moved to the active display area 5F ends. The rotational display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the rotating display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the rotating display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the rotating display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 33(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 34, the rotating display in the third production mode is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the first side 5a and the second side 5b, and during the rotating display, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state. , becomes non-transparent when the rotating display stops. The number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a side of the decorative pattern which becomes semi-transparent during rotational display is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b side is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first side 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second side 5b, which is the back side, is difficult to see. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated and displayed at a medium speed and the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern display area 5L, In the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second side 5b is visible, but the number "548" displayed (to be displayed) on the first side 5a, which is the reverse side, is visible. ' is said to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34(C), in a semi-transparent state where the decorative pattern is rotated and displayed at high speed and the transmittance is a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first side 5a is difficult to see, but it is visible, and the number "763" displayed on the second side 5b (the back side) is (scheduled to be displayed). "874" is said to be difficult to see. Note that during high-speed rotation display, both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see.

In this way, when rotating a decorative pattern and repeatedly displaying the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, so that the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first side 5a) Not only the side but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) can be seen through and become visible, but in this case, while the numbers on the front side (e.g., first side 5a) are displayed, the numbers on the back side (e.g., number 5b) are displayed. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side will not be displayed overlapping, which prevents the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. Furthermore, even when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern is in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)). may be executed repeatedly, and by doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Example of operation of variable display in 4th production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the fourth performance mode will be described based on FIG. 35.

FIG. 35(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scroll-displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the fourth performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, in the active display area 5F, an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and in the special figure pending memory display area 5U, two first pending displays 002SG101 are displayed (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hand hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the nearer side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols. (See Figure 23(A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. The active display 002SG103 is deleted from the area 5F, and a deletion effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been deleted.

As shown in FIG. 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 35(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 35(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 35(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 35(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 35(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbol display area 5L, Scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance reaches approximately 100%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 35(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

As explained above, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs the action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type of fluctuation pattern designation command ( For example, when a variable display is executed based on a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command), By being able to perform a common shift display, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the common shift display is performed, so the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing a pending shift display with the start of variable display, and also displays a special symbol pending memory display. Until the first pending display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in area 5U, is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of decorative symbols is not started, while in the high base state , the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative pattern fluctuation start action is not performed while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols when performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs The scroll display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type When a variable display is executed based on a variation pattern specification command of the second type (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command) Since it is possible to perform a common shift display even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, a common shift display can be performed even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, reducing the number of shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display ends, the left , the right, and the center display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. With the start of the variable display, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the display is displayed in any one of the left, right, and center decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. If the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started when the shift display is being performed. It's okay.

(Example of operation of each part when the symbol is stopped and displayed)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the symbol is stopped will be explained based on FIGS. 36 to 40. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode (second performance mode). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 36. FIG. 38 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). FIGS. 39A and 39B are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth production mode (third production mode).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 1st production mode [Number of pending memories “2 or less”])
First, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 36 and 37. do. It should be noted that the second presentation mode is substantially the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative pattern is scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed, is reduced, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative patterns improves. (See FIG. 36(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 36(C)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 36(D)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) to restore the original size is executed (see FIG. 36(E)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative pattern improves (see FIG. 36(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(G)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 36(H)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed to restore the original size (see FIG. 37(I)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

When the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative pattern improves (see FIG. 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 37(K)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display area 002SG052 The character displayed in is enlarged (see FIG. 37(L)), and then a fluctuation stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) to restore the original size is executed (see FIG. 37(M)). Then, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started in the temporarily stopped display state, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol is finished.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is finished and is stopped and displayed. Active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 37(M)).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 1st production mode [number of pending memories: 3 pieces])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 38(A) to 38(G). . It should be noted that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative pattern is scrolled at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed, is reduced, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decorative patterns improves. (See FIG. 38(B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 38(C)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. The fade-in display is executed gradually, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(E)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. As the display progresses, a fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved (see FIG. 38(F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 38(G)), the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052 The fluctuation stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Further, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is finished and is stopped and displayed. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 38(G)).

(Example of operation of symbol stop display in 4th production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches in a state where the decorative patterns are being scrolled and displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed display is stopped. The display speed of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. (See FIG. 39(B)).

Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are all temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the action of stopping the fluctuation of the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the ornamental symbols that were temporarily displayed in each ornamental symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See Figure 39(C)).

In this way, in the low base state, depending on the number of pending memories (for example, when the number of pending memories is 2 or less and a variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decorative pattern is temporarily changed by the variation stop action. While it is possible to improve interest by adding variation to the movement when the display is stopped, there are cases where the number of pending memories is 3 in the low base state, or when the average variable display period is short and it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative patterns. In this state, if variable display is executed based on the shortened variation pattern regardless of the number of retained memories, the visibility of the decorative pattern will be impaired by temporarily stopping display while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action. It can be stopped to prevent it from happening.

In this embodiment, data of animations (moving images) of various movements of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of variable display to the front of high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Low speed variable display ~ variable display stop, 4. It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as stop symbols, but 2. Regarding the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative pattern is high and it is almost transparent, and the high-speed variable display is clearly visible. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). ). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (types depending on which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it does not make much sense and the capacity of the ROM 121 is limited. Therefore, it is preferable that common data be used for the animation data of the high-speed variable display, regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of the background change operation will be described based on FIGS. 40 and 41. In FIG. 40, (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first production mode.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the first production mode, the first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40 (A1)), which represents the scenery of the city seen from a distance in the daytime, and the scenery of the city in the daytime, are used as the background images. The first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40 (A2)) representing the first predetermined background image can be switched and displayed. Switching of the background image is executed when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when a SP reach deviation occurs) is satisfied. In this embodiment, SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing in the next variable display after the SP reach (for example, at the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the first effect mode, the display is switched between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, although not particularly illustrated, three or more types of background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be switched and selectively displayed. Furthermore, the establishment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but also when a specific effect other than SP reach is executed, when one background image is continuously displayed for a predetermined period, or when the player This may also be true when the selection is made through an operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be before the decorative pattern reaches the reach state. , any timing in the variable display period may be used.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when the first background image 002SG081 is switched to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the first background image 002SG081A is switched to the first background image 002SG081), Fade-out display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 displayed with 100% opacity is gradually increased and erased, while the first predetermined background image 002SG081 is hidden with 0% opacity. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. In other words, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1) . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), from the state in which the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time and becomes difficult to see. (See FIG. 41(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and it gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 41(B)). 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see FIGS. 41(D) and (E)), and eventually the transparency of the first background image 002SG081 increases. On the other hand, the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and becomes easier to see (see FIG. 41(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period, but the present invention is not limited to this, only a part of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may be started after the fade-out display period A1 ends. May be started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate, for example. , the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in the first period, and then rapidly increase or decrease in the second period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mode in which background images are switched and displayed in one production mode (for example, the first production mode or the second production mode) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even when the first background image corresponding to the first production mode is switched and displayed to the second background image corresponding to the second production mode, the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image It is also applicable to those in which the period is synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an example of the operation of each part in variable display in each production mode will be explained based on FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first production mode. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second production mode. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first production mode, (B) the second production mode, and (C) the third production mode and the fourth production mode. .

(1st production mode)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the first production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small symbols were variably displayed at high speed, and a fluctuation start action was performed in the order of the ornamental symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is set at the start of the variable display. A fade-out display in which the transparency (transparency) gradually increases is started, while a fade-in display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque is started.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

In addition, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded-in is from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. The period is longer than the fade-in display period B21 (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are colored white, A light emission pattern of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Furthermore, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 43, in the second production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the fluctuation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is set at the start of the variable display. A fade-out display in which the transparency (transparency) gradually increases is started, while a fade-in display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque is started.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols is ended and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the scroll display of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started until the display becomes high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing this, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display disappears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed. With regard to the fade-out display that may be executed at different times (e.g., when the background image is faded out), attention should be paid to the fact that the fade-out display of the decorative design is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background image, which means that the variable display of the decorative design has started. be able to.

In addition, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded-in is from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. The period is longer than the fade-in display period B22 (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing this, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display appears suddenly the shorter the period of time it is executed. Regarding the fade-in display that may be executed at certain times (e.g., when the background is fade-in), please note that the variable display of the decorative pattern ends when the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background. can be done.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B)). By doing this, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of scrolling display of decorative patterns different from that in the first presentation mode, but also the scrolling display starts and then becomes a high-speed display, so that the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until the display becomes difficult becomes longer, attention can be drawn to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the second performance mode, a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from the top to the bottom in the first performance mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display The special variable display, which is different in aspect from the above, is not only the one that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the back side to the front side as described above, but also, as explained in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as those that move the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, and those that move in a straight line or curved manner from the bottom to the top. Good too.

In addition, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different between the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first production mode and the case where the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second production mode. different. By doing this, since the fade-out display period is the same even though the performance modes are different, it is possible for the player to predict that the determined fluctuation pattern is the non-reachable fluctuation pattern PA1-1. This makes the game more difficult, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 during which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling and display at high speed. In other words, because the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time (for example, at the start of variable display), it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of decorative symbols has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

In addition, during the fade-in display period B1 in which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is fade-in displayed, and in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, from when the display speed starts to decelerate until when the display is temporarily stopped. is different from the fade-in display period B22, that is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time (for example, when the variable display stops, etc.). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, it is possible to make the decorative pattern stand out.

Further, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are colored white, A light emission pattern of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Furthermore, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-3 of shortened non-reach is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without performing a variation start action. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 45(C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all gradually decelerate all at once to a low-speed display, and the transmittance decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) also decreases, causing the image to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. That is, the variable stop action and loop action such as in the first performance mode and the second performance mode are not executed, and the variable display ends as it is, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together with the small symbols. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is executed in the third production mode or the scroll display is executed in the fourth production mode. Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode (fade-out Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 45(A) to 45(C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b control the rhythm, melody, and meter of the high-bass music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. The light is emitted according to the output of the Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the high base state, the movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern. , a form in which the light is emitted in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of a high bass song has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 24(B)), the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is repeatedly executed, and the background BGM is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may also be output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Example of operation of customer waiting demonstration production)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be explained based on FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a starting prize occurs during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

As shown in FIG. 46, the "customer waiting demo performance" is a performance that notifies customers that they are in a customer waiting (playing standby) state. This is an effect that is started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, after the initial operation of the movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. is executed in the initial operation control process when the power is turned on, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 46(A)). When a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without any variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/volume/light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is hidden, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance begins (see FIG. 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demonstration performance, after a video is displayed that sequentially introduces multiple ally characters (which may include images of enemy characters) and content that appear in various performances (Fig. 46 (B) ~ (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the production position while the image of allied characters gathered remains displayed (see Fig. 46(F)), and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, moves up to the origin position. (See FIGS. 46(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 46(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46(J)).

Note that when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration performance ended, the customer waiting demonstration performance is started again. Even after that, the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the performance mode of the customer waiting demonstration performance as the waiting performance is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIGS. 46(B) to 46(H)), the small symbols are continuously displayed in a stopped state in the display area 5S, while the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative designs are not displayed on 5R. In this way, by displaying the small symbols even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An example of the operation when a starting prize occurs while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the first start winning occurs (the variable display start condition is met) while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 47(B), , While the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is being displayed, variable display of small symbols is started in the display area 5S.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) of the first pending display 002SG101 from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F is started, and the movement start action of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is moved to the left, Starts from right to center.

As shown in FIG. 47(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed, as shown in FIG. 47(E), the decoration of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and scrolling display starts (see FIG. 47(F)).

In this way, if a starting prize occurs while the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then After the demo production image 002SG400 is hidden and the background image corresponding to the production mode at that time (in this case, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first production mode) is displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed. Scroll display starts.

In other words, if the scrolling display of decorative symbols starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first starting prize, so the small symbols While starting the variable display of the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scrolling display is started after the shift display of the hold display ends. The player can be made aware that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first starting prize. On the other hand, when switching the display from the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081 and starting the scroll display after the shift display ends, there is a large time lag from the occurrence of the first starting prize to the start of the scroll display. Therefore, since the variable display of the small symbols starts before the customer waiting demonstration performance image 002SG400 is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46(A), (I), and (J), after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the state is in the first production mode or the second production mode, the loop action of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed (see Fig. 23(C)) is executed, and the main lamp 9a, frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) is executed in the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 23(C)) is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable lamp At 9d, light emission control is performed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, making it possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern. In other words, while it is possible to promote the restart of the game, in the high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbol nor the loop light emission control is executed, so the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) This can draw attention to the fact that it is being executed. It is not necessary to perform the loop action of the decorative pattern in the first performance mode or the second performance mode, or it is possible to perform the loop action of the decorative pattern in the third performance mode or the fourth performance mode.

In addition, the reason why the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state is that it is unlikely that the player will end the game in the high base state, and it is likely that the player is simply away from the game. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state with no variable display, and by appealing with a loop action, other players can avoid accidentally sitting down. suppressed.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses on "movement", but for example, actions such as changing the position of a decorative pattern, swinging, or deforming are not performed. However, it may be possible to perform an animation such as moving and displaying a highlight on the decorative pattern while the display is stopped and flashing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, fourth background image 002SG084, character images, and other performance images (not shown) that are displayed as background images in the high bass state are adjusted to match the high bass music. Alternatively, an animation may be displayed, such as a background image moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed, but the animation display continues for the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084. You can also do this.

(Example of operation of pseudo-continuation notice)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive notice will be explained based on FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of a pseudo consecutive notice. In FIG. 49, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number display and symbol color, (B) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number display and the type of symbol color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number display color determination table. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the "pseudo consecutive notice", after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display is stopped. This is an effect that incites whether or not it will be restarted, that is, whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), the pseudo continuous notice is divided into two types: a "pseudo continuous single pattern" in which the total number of variable displays is two times with the first variable display and one re-variable display, and the first variable display and two variable displays. It is possible to execute a "pseudo-continuation pattern of two times" in which the total number of variable displays is three times, and if the super reach (pseudo-continuation of one time) variation pattern is selected. The "pseudo repeat pattern once" is executed, and if the variation pattern of super reach (pseudo repeat twice) is selected, the "pseudo repeat pattern twice" is executed. It should be noted that the expectation level of jackpot is higher for the ``pseudo consecutive 2-time pattern'' than for the ``pseudo consecutive 1-time pattern''.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decorative symbol display area is A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a ready-to-reach state. Afterward (see FIG. 48(B)), the pseudo-reckon pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and the first variable display is performed again. In other words, a pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(F)). , the variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, middle ornamental symbol display area 5C, and right ornamental symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(G)). In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive notice is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes through the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C is displayed. Decorative symbols with large numbers are displayed in a static manner, and the variable display result of the failure is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of a pseudo-continuous notice of the "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols is variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. The decorative pattern that had been displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern that was temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 48(M)), and develops into an SP reach effect.

In addition, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed in FIG. 48(G), in the case of a pseudo continuous notice of the "pseudo continuous pattern", the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then , A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and after reaching the reach state again, the words "NEXT!" are displayed on the surface. The pseudo connected pattern on which is displayed is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(I)), and the second variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 of “×3” indicating that the display has started is displayed above the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48 (J)), the left decoration pattern display area 5L, the center decoration The variable display of decorative symbols is restarted in the symbol display area 5C and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed. The symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R to become a ready-to-reach mode (see FIG. 48(M)), which develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect.

The pseudo-repeat notice includes an introductory part as a period to incite whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 48 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L)). ), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 48(D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether variable display has been restarted or not. .

As shown in FIG. 49 (B1), in the pseudo consecutive announcement, after the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, when the variable display is restarted, the variable display is restarted. A pseudo-repeat number display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times the Specifically, the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 (FIG. 48 (F) (G) (see Figure 48 (J) (K) ) is displayed.

The pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49 (B1) and the pseudo continuous number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. Further, as explained with reference to FIG. 19, normal symbols made of even numbers are colored "blue", and probability variable symbols made of odd numbers are colored "red". The display color for displaying the number of pseudo consecutive times is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 in the variable display number setting process described with reference to FIG. Ru.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, when the variable display result is "probable variable jackpot", the color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 and Display colors that are non-identical (for example, the pattern color is blue, the pseudo-sequence number display color is red/the pattern color is red, and the pseudo-sequence number display color is blue) are determined at a rate of 10%, and determined in step 002SGS276. A display color that is the same color as the pattern color of the decorated decorative pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-sequence number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-sequence number display color are red) is determined at a ratio of 90%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "non-probable variable jackpot", the display color is different from the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue, the pseudo consecutive number display color is Red/design color is red, pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) is determined at a ratio of 30%, and the display color is the same as the design color of the decorative design determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the design color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are blue). The consecutive number display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are red) at a ratio of 70%.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo consecutive number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) at a rate of 90%. The display color is blue/the symbol color and the pseudo consecutive number display color are red) at a ratio of 10%.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive notice, there are cases where the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and cases where the display color of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo continuous number display are the first combination of non-identical colors. There are cases where the display color becomes a second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is restarted with the second combination is better than the case where the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo-continuation notice. The percentage of games that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, as the pseudo series number display for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series, The rate at which the same color blue is determined is higher than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo consecutive number display for the first pseudo consecutive and the second pseudo consecutive is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain blue color is determined is lower than the rate at which a non-identical color, red, is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, when the variable probability symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo series for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain red color is determined is higher than the rate at which a non-identical color, blue, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the variable probability symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo series for the first pseudo series and the second pseudo series is displayed in the same color. The rate at which a certain red color is determined is lower than the rate at which a non-identical color, blue, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49 (B1)), the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 is " For the first pseudo-run, which is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) where the temporarily stopped display and the number and display color of the pseudo-run count display 002SG212 are the same type of blue. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the number in the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo series where pseudo series number display 002SG213 is "x3", the number of pseudo series number display 002SG212 is different from the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, but the display color is the same type of blue. The 3rd combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the numbers and display color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are different red. determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo consecutives for the first pseudo consecutive and second pseudo consecutive is displayed. , the rate at which the same color blue is determined is lower than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when the variable probability symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo series where the pseudo series number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" The numbers of the temporary stop display and the number of pseudo continuous number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red) whose display color is the same type of red is the temporary stop display. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative pattern, the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, and the display color are different blue.

In addition, for the second pseudo series where pseudo series number display 002SG213 is "x3", a second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 numbers are the same type, but the display color is different blue. determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo consecutives for the first pseudo consecutive and second pseudo consecutive is displayed. , the rate at which the same color blue is determined is lower than the rate at which the non-identical color red is determined.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the numbers of the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213 are the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous number display are different. There are cases where the first combination becomes the first combination, and cases where the second combination where both the temporarily stopped displayed decorative pattern and the number and display color of the pseudo-sequence display are the same type, and the first combination is displayed in the pseudo-sequence notice. The probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is restarted using the second combination than when the variable display is restarted using the second combination. In addition, when the game is executed, attention can be drawn to the combination of the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the rate of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo consecutives is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variable pattern of one pseudo consecutive is determined. , the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed during the second pseudo-run than the case where the second combination of the same kind of decorative pattern, the numbers and display color of the number of pseudo-runs displayed, and the number and display color displayed in the first pseudo-run. By making the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state higher when both the numbers and the display color of the number of pseudo series display are the same type of second combination, the number of executions of the pseudo series and the number of pseudo series executions are increased. It is possible to draw attention to the number displayed by the number of times and the color displayed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative pattern becomes a variable pattern, so the pseudo-variable pattern is The ratio of being controlled to a probability-variable jackpot game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo consecutive runs is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one consecutive series is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is determined to be one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color for displaying the pseudo consecutive number may be a predetermined display color for each pseudo consecutive number, but is not limited to this.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213, "x2" or "x3" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous number display 002SG212, 002SG213 is The consecutive number display can be changed in various ways as long as the pseudo consecutive number can be specified, such as "nth consecutive" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth", "nth revariation". It can be displayed in various ways such as.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the number of the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo continuous number display are of the same type and the same color only when the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop is the same type and the same color. is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the number of pseudo consecutive display is 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and the temporary stop display is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo consecutive number display is 002SG212 ("x2", blue) There were two patterns for the number of times display 002SG213 (×3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a normal symbol (“4”, green), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display (×4 , green) may be available, and the numerical color of the decorative pattern, the numerical color of the pseudo consecutive number display, and the pseudo consecutive number can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo continuous notice, even when the number of the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo continuous number display, the pseudo continuous Decide whether or not to make the consecutive number display color the same as the number of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern. If the same color is decided, the expectation level is higher than if it is decided to be a non-identical color. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the display color of the number of pseudo consecutive runs.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo-continuation announcement, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the reach state is reached. After that, the pseudo continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the re-variable display is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-coupling pattern can be changed in various ways. In addition, after a decorative pattern with a number different from the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the left decorative pattern display area 5L or the right decorative pattern display area 5R is displayed. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous decorative pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C.

It should be noted that the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo-continuous notice do not necessarily have to be the same as the fixed ornamental symbols that are stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after a normal symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, a probability variable pattern, that is, a different symbol from the first pseudo-run, may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Further, the number of times of pseudo series is not limited to the above two times, and pseudo series (re-variable display) may be executed three or more times.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of reach performance. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following FIG. 50. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. In the following, an example of the operation of the ready-to-reach effect in the first effect mode will be explained, but a similar ready-to-reach effect may be executed in the second to fourth effect modes as well.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern is started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L is The decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 50(B)), and then the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 50(C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. Furthermore, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see FIG. 24(B)).

In addition, in FIGS. 50(B) and (C), the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this. , decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the ready-to-reach effect is started, the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the middle ornamental symbol is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern (almost transparent and invisible) that is being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggestion performance is started. Reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol is displayed on the reach line. This is a display that suggests that the decorative pattern in area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 50(D), for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, only the character in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged, like the above-mentioned fluctuation stop action. Rather than being displayed, a number display section 002SG051, a character display section 002SG052, an information display section 002SG053, and a pedestal display section 002SG054 forming a decorative pattern are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this way, by providing the enlarged display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display has not been stopped but has entered the ready-to-reach mode.

When the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 50(D), the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size near the stop position in the middle ornament symbol display area 5C so as to be superimposed on the ornament symbol that is being variably displayed. After that, it is gradually extended linearly toward the stop position (left and right direction) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see FIG. 50(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 50 (F)), the aspect changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see Fig. 50 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see Fig. 50 (H)), and the final It is erased and becomes hidden (see FIG. 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50(F), in the reach line suggestion production, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge display), and also change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. By turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B placed around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 while changing the display screen, the area around the display screen becomes darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(D), after the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, the left ornamental symbol is moved to the left, and the right ornamental symbol is The decorative patterns start moving toward the right, that is, in the direction of moving away from each other (see FIG. 50(E)). In addition, the display rotates by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction while being separated from each other (see Fig. 50 (F)), and the movement and rotation display ends when the farthest separated position on the left and right sides of the display screen is reached. A temporary stop is displayed (see FIG. 50(G)).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed in the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated while being displayed from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal display position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), when the decorative symbols are restored in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and becomes hidden, it is variably displayed in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C. As the scroll display speed gradually decreases, the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases and the decorative pattern is displayed as a fade-in (see Figures 51 (J) to (K)). The ratio is 0% (opaque), and scrolling display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 51(L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing the reach line suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R. , and a spaced display in which the decorative pattern is spaced apart after the enlarged display is executed. Since the second period te1 is longer (td1<te1), the player can recognize the decorative symbols forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2<tf1 ), it is possible to make the player recognize the decorative symbols that form the ready-to-reach state, and to quickly reduce the size when restoring to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R are enlarged, attention is drawn to which ornamental symbol will be stopped and displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of decorative patterns, a moving display is performed to separate the left and right decorative patterns. Attention can be drawn to the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified to be displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L and the right ornamental symbol display area 5R to become the ready-to-reach mode, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the reach mode.

In addition, the movable lamp 9d changes the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light is turned off while changing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light may be turned off at the same time as the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Moreover, the brightness is not limited to being turned off, and may be lowered than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific light emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed is built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5. Although the embodiment in which the movable lamp 9d is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting means may be a lamp provided around the image display device 5 as described above. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on a game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on a gaming machine frame 3 are not limited to those provided on a movable body that can be operated. It may also be a frame lamp 9b, etc., and especially if it is a lamp provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made noticeable by turning off the lamp. be able to.

In addition, after executing the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set to be higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing of setting the second transmittance F2, which has a low transmittance (transparency), is the timing after reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C, so that the variable display in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is set. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of reach line effect display 002SG250.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C, the transmittance of the decorative pattern in the center decoration pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transmittance F2 almost simultaneously when the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration symbol display area 5C. The transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C.

(Example of operation of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect following FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after reaching the reach mode explained in FIG. 50(C), the type of SP reach effect By displaying the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the reach title, the reach title is notified, and the SP reach effect as a notification effect that informs whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, etc.) ) is started (see FIGS. 53(B) and (C)). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect. Incidentally, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time when the battle is settled until the predetermined operational validity period has passed, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 53(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 53(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. When the jackpot is confirmed, a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device and is displayed in frame from the lower right side of the display screen, then runs towards the left and temporarily appears in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The number display section 002SG051 of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is lit (see FIG. 53(H)).

As shown in FIG. 55(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being lit at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each symbol is shown in FIGS. 55(B) to (D). The number increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, and is displayed near the number of the number display section 002SG051. Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 55(D), the flame image that constitutes the specific image 002SG075 is a loop display of three images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C) with different aspects. By doing this, the flame appears to be moving. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the production position, and result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)), in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 When is displayed, a combination of determined symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the small pattern and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled (see Fig. 53 (E)), After a result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won a battle with an enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as a background image in the notification effect. Then, a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(O)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the production position, and result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 53(K)), in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 54(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(S), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. When is displayed, a combination of determined symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the small pattern and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in action on the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration symbol that is displayed after the end of the notification effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect and enlivening it ( (Refer to FIGS. 53(H) and (I)), in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in action on the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIG. 54(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display section 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decorative pattern combination displayed after the end of the SP reach effect. Although the form is exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied. good.

Furthermore, the motion display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flame sways as described above, but also the manner in which the specific image rotates around the number display section 002SG051 or changes in form or display color. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display section 002SG051 by the character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the character 002SG074 can display a specific image without acting on each decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention.

The fluctuation stop action in the embodiment is an enlarged display of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing the stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern is moved in the opposite direction and restored to the stopped position. It may be moved and displayed as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern gradually moves downward in the direction of the white arrow while being displayed as decelerating toward the stop position, and reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is performed (see FIG. 56 (A3)), the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the information display section 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped at the stop position, while the number display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the display continues to move further downward.

At this time, the moving distance L2 from when the number display section 002SG051 passes the stop position until it is temporarily stopped is longer than the moving distance L2 from when the character display section 002SG052 passes the stop position until it is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display section 002SG051 and the character display section 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display section 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A5)), the character display section 002SG052 moves upward. The display unit 002SG052 passes through the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56 (A6)). In this way, the moving distance L3 from when the numeric display section 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until it is displayed as a temporary stop is as follows: (L3<L2). Finally, the number display section 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes through the stop position and moves upward in FIG. 56 (A6) is a rising action that is different from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in FIG. 23 (A). The difference from the start action can be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing when it reaches the stop position, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, it is displayed in the opposite direction. By displaying the display so that it moves to the side and returns to the stop position, it is possible to make it appear as if a part of the display section has passed by with force, thereby creating a sense of reality.

In addition, while the first display section (for example, the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the information display section 002SG053) among the plurality of display sections is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display section (for example, the numeric display section 002SG051) By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, it is possible to provide movement while preventing the stop position from becoming unclear. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of one number display section 002SG051 and the other character display section 002SG052 different from each other in the second display section, it is possible to display actions that match the size and appearance of the display section. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modified Example 3 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 3 of the present invention.

In the embodiment, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative patterns before and after the statically displayed decorative pattern are not displayed temporarily, the present invention is not limited to this. When one of the decorative patterns (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (e.g., decorative pattern "2", decorative pattern "4") The section may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when any of the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 57(A) and 57(B)), perform the variable stop action. In this case (see FIGS. 57(C) and (D)), the execution target of the variable stop action is the decorative pattern that is displayed as a temporary stop at the stop position, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for decorative symbols.

By doing so, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols, a temporary stop display is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By once enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols that have been displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and to derive missing combinations that originally have no meaning to the player. Even when the decorative symbols are displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept in the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. In addition, when displaying an enlarged display of a temporarily stopped decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative patterns that are not located in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the load on display control can also be reduced.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continued even when enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIGS. 42 and 43), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. In addition, when a plurality of valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other variations)
In addition, when the variable display mode changes to the ready-to-reach mode and then develops into the SP ready-to-reach effect, the first predetermined operation in which the left and right decorative symbols forming the ready-to-reach mode move to the front side of the display screen, and the back of the display screen. Only the number display section 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed (for example, to the left and right sides of the upper part of the display screen) by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined motion than in the first predetermined motion.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display part 002SG051 and the information display part 002SG053, and when the variable display starts, the number display part 002SG051 is a number different from the scroll display. The information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be deleted before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment, either the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be executed in the low base state, the third effect mode can be executed in the low accuracy high base state, and the fourth effect can be executed in the high accuracy high base state. Although the mode is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of production modes may be executed in a low base state, or three or more types of production modes may be executed in a high base state. The mode may also be executable.

In addition, in the embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the first scrolling display in the vertical direction, in the second presentation mode, the second scrolling display that curves from the back side to the front side, and in the third presentation mode, the rotating display, and the fourth In the production mode, a form in which the third scroll display in the vertical direction is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot gaming state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. , a small winning game state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state is defined as a low-accuracy low-base state, and the special states in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than the normal state are defined as a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the normal state may be a low probability state, and the special state may be a high probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), and when the jackpot game ends, the time saving state or the probability variable state is set. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in a state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control to a time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or to be advantageous in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of Pachinko machine 1). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game is changed to time-saving state A, and the predetermined state is set without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Time saving state B is a time saving state that is controlled based on the number of times variable display has been executed, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time-saving state that is controlled based on what has been done may be called the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the above-mentioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results for winning the time-saving state C are provided, and the control is performed according to the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C. The number of variable display times during which time saving control is performed may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

[Example]
Further, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed (Figures 90 to 93 , FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 109, FIG. 120, FIG. 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. In addition, since the type of background image is different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
Type 1-2 gaming machines are
It is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect in one variable display,
When the specific effect is executed without executing the predetermined effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed without executing the specific effect (FIGS. 90 to 93 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
Type 1-3 gaming machines are
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image,
The first predetermined part is executable when the first background image is displayed;
A second background image is displayed during execution of the second predetermined part,
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background inciting effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed with the predetermined effect, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the second background image is displayed with the second background stimulation effect (see FIG. 87);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to which of the predetermined effect and the second background enhancing effect is used to display the second background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state.
When the predetermined effect is executed before the execution of the specific effect, there is a higher expectation that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 90 to 93).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the user expect that both the predetermined performance and the specific performance will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-2 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state.
The background images include a first background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, and the decoration identification information. a third background image after the is in the reach state, and a fourth background image that is more advantageous than the third background image after the decoration identification information is in the reach state,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with the second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see FIGS. 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-3 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effects of the second predetermined part and the specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-4 is
The debris image is capable of performing rotational movements;
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 140 and 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-5 is
When the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-5]
Game machines of form 1-5 are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 141),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-6]
Game machines of form 1-6 are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect have the same period of time until they are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 132 and 137);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-2 is
The visibility of a fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 132 and 137).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect (see FIG. 141). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Type 1-8 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means, and The number of rotation operations performed from when the fragment images of No. 2 are displayed until they are hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIGS. 140 and 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 102, Fig. 103, Fig. 109, Fig. 120, Fig. 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to suitably execute the predetermined effect and the specific effect by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIGS. 120 and 125);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
Type 2-3 gaming machines are
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part;
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 120);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the fragment image can be started using the effect image without causing any discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
Type 2-4 gaming machines are
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 109),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that changes from the first speed to the second speed and moves over the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 105, 112, 122, 127, and 129). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. In addition, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed differs between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment image, the speed at which the fragment image is displayed can be suitably different. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
In one variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can be executed once,
When the predetermined effect is executed multiple times, there is a higher expectation that the predetermined effect will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the predetermined effect is executed once.
There is a higher expectation that the specific effect will be controlled in an advantageous state when the specific effect is executed once than when the predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see FIGS. 90 to 93).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
Type 3-3 gaming machines are
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 105(C) and 112(C)),
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that it moves at a first speed during a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and from the specific timing it moves non-stop in the display area of the display means. Displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed over a second period until it is displayed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 129),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the same time as a fragment image is displayed in a specific performance,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 127, 129, and 138).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form 3-5]
Type 3-5 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plural fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plural fragment images in the specific performance. This number is greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least part of the background image in a superimposed relationship to be recognized (Figs. 105, 112, 116, 117, 122, 127, 139),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even performances in which the fragment image is similarly displayed can give suitably different impressions. It is possible to increase interest in games.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The specific performance is a performance that includes displaying a special image together with the display of the fragment image,
The fragment image and special image in a specific performance are in a superimposed relationship,
The first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image can be recognized,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image and at least a portion of the special image (see FIG. 139). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the display mode of the fragment image different for each performance, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of each performance.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment image in a specific performance can be rotated,
When the first fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the first fragment image is at the second angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 140 and 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-2 is
In the specific effect, when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 105, Figure 112, Figure 122, Figure 127),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragmented image moves is the same between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required for it to disappear is different, so the fragmented image can be displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 134 and 138).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect (see FIG. 141). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (for example, see FIG. 140(A)),
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance is hidden in the display area of the display means in a manner that it moves outside the display area,
Among the fragment images in the specific performance, the second fragment image different from the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (for example, in FIG. 140(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment images are displayed between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode in accordance with the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes the mode from the crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is to display an object image, and to perform a predetermined effect from when a crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed according to the movement of the object image. It is a production that starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from the display of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode to the display of the fragment image in the predetermined production is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in the specific production. long,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIGS. 106 to 108, FIG. 116, FIG. 117, FIG. 123 , see Figure 124),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, and the display period of the fragment image is different, Even a performance in which images are displayed can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see FIGS. 116, 117, 122, and 127),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is continued for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part. (See FIG. 123).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the third predetermined part is not executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
There is a first pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state.
When the variable display is performed by the first pattern, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 123);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, there is a higher expectation that the third predetermined part will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 90 to 93).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the third predetermined part in the predetermined performance is being executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
The type 6-5 gaming machine is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 106(G) and 108(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
It is possible to highlight the decoration identification information in the reach state in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period in which the decoration identification information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 107(I) to 107(K));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the game is in a ready-to-reach state.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is
A motion-enhanced image can be displayed in response to the motion of the object image in the first predetermined part;
It can be displayed in a display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
displaying a motion-enhanced image at the timing of starting display of a crack precursor image in a crack mode (see FIG. 106(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to change the crack precursor image into a crack pattern without causing any discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-2 is
It is possible to display small fragment images together with motion-enhanced images.
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion-enhanced image (see FIG. 106(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a crack mode.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-3 is
an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image in the second predetermined part;
Do not display the motion emphasis image when displaying the effect image (see FIG. 106(H) and FIG. 123),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the first predetermined part different from the second predetermined part and prevent the predetermined performance from becoming a monotonous performance.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different (FIG. 123);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in the way they are presented in the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-8]
Type 6-8 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment image can be made different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of form 6-9 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed to when it becomes hidden in the display area of the display means is longer than from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it becomes hidden from the display area of the display means. (see Figures 123 and 124),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a motion promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display operation promotion images in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The movement promotion performance is a performance that displays a movement promotion image for a valid movement period and changes the display mode of the movement promotion image from a movement promotion mode to a movement completion mode when a movement of the player is detected.
When the motion promotion image changes from a motion promotion mode to a motion completion mode due to the motion promotion effect, a specific effect can be executed;
During at least a part of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the motion promotion image of the motion completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is shorter than the display period of the movement promotion image in the movement promotion mode, and longer than the display period of the movement promotion image in the movement completion mode (FIGS. 102, 103, 112, 120, (see Figure 127),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby making it possible to perform various timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the interest of a specific performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer differs before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (Fig. 102, Fig. 103, Fig. 105, Fig. 120, Fig. 122),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, in the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the types of background images are different between before and after the fragment image is displayed, so even if the same effect displays the fragment image, It is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 105, FIG. 120, and FIG. 122),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. ,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 102, Fig. 103, Fig. 105, Fig. 120, Fig. 122),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be suitably executed by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 102, 103, and 105),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 110, FIG. 111, FIG. 120, see FIGS. 126 and 129),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even if the fragment image is displayed in the same way, it gives suitably different impressions and enhances the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 110(H)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and in a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden. displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 129),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can show a difference in the way the fragment images are presented, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 110 and 129);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (see FIG. 140(A));
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means in a manner that it moves toward the outside of the display area,
Among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden from view in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (FIG. 140(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in the way they are presented between the first predetermined effect and the second specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figures 75 and 133),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction differs depending on when it starts displaying and before it disappears (see FIGS. 75 and 133).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part. greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image among the images is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 140 and 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 140 and 146);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be performed,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
When the first predetermined effect is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 90 to 93);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 120 and 126),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 105, 102, 103, 122, and 120).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment image, suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased. I can do it.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions, at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a predetermined direction.
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figure 102, Figure 103, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 120, Figure 126),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, although the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required until the fragment images are hidden is different, so even if the fragment image is displayed in the same manner, it is suitable. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes from a first crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image, displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image. a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of corresponding fragment images;
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from starting the second predetermined part to moving to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from starting the fourth predetermined part to moving to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 106, FIG. 107, (see Figures 123 and 120),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed and the display period of the fragment image are different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if it is a performance, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the third pre-crack mode to the third crack mode (see FIGS. 106 and 102);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect can be executed at a specific timing after executing the first predetermined effect,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
When executing the second predetermined effect after the first predetermined effect, the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 99, 100, see Figure 118),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be performed continuously, it is possible to continuously surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to continuously surprise the player. , because the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is hidden, a new crack precursor image is displayed even though the fragment image is already displayed. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the production effect.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The position at which the display of the fragment image starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 99, 100, and 141);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in the first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (see FIGS. 99(F) and 100(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can have different presentations of the special image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is
The length of the display period of the fragment image is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the length of the display period of the special image is common (see FIG. 118);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which a second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined effect is not executed after the first predetermined effect is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that when the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 129);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be related to each other and the interest can be increased.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 99(C), FIG. 100(C), and FIG. 118);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIG. 118);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification effect that the control is not in an advantageous state, displaying a crack precursor image of the second crack mode and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image;
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period to be hidden in the display area of the display means,
The fragment image when it is notified by the notification effect that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state requires a second period different from the first period before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (Figs. 102, 103, 115, see FIG. 120, FIG. 128(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, it is possible to surprise the player by displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image. By displaying the crack precursor image together with the fragment images that require different periods of time, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The crack precursor image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state has a longer display period than the crack precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 120);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the control is not in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
There is a first fragment image with the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part,
There is a second fragment image that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is reported that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state,
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (for example, see FIGS. 103 (J) and 115 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIG. 130).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction ( For example, see FIGS. 75 and 134),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images more relevant and more interesting.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is
In the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state, the specific Can display color effect images,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 115(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
When the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the first light emission pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emission means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed,
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification effect in which it is notified that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state is completed (FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 115, FIG. 120, 128(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, and furthermore, it continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the crack precursor image and notification effect are completed. By using the second light emitting pattern, it is possible to notify the player that the control is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed (Figs. 102(A) to 102(F), Fig. 103(I) ~See Figure 103(K)),
The display mode of the background image differs between before it is announced whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect and when the fragment image is displayed when it is announced that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state (Fig. 115(A), FIG. 115(B), FIG. 115(D), FIG. 120, FIG. 128(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image, it is possible to surprise the player, and furthermore, by using the crack precursor image, it is possible to control whether or not to be controlled to be in an advantageous state. By changing the display mode of the background image before being notified, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images;
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a sixth predetermined part,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 102, 103, 105, 120, 122),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Moreover, by displaying the fragment image by operating the movable body after displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while being changed from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode;
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 120 and 122),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is commonly displayed at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 105(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display patterns of the effect images different, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the movable body is placed at the advanced position (see FIG. 105(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 122);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the motion of the movable body in the suggestion production, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first motion of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 122);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images;
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production that includes
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means. (see FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 113, FIG. 114, FIG. 120, and FIG. 128(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, by operating the movable body and displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 120 and 128),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102(G) and 113(E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
The display of the effect image is started when the second operation is started (see FIG. 113(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 128);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first motion of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 128);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a third predetermined part,
The specific effect is to display a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect according to the first movement of the movable body. It is a production that starts displaying,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
In the specific performance, the movable body can perform a second action different from the first action, and starts the second action of the movable body after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 102, 103, 109, 120, 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, so that it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and further, By operating the movable body and displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the first operation is started (see FIG. 109(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of a specific production can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-2 is
The effect image can be displayed over a display period including a first display period and a second display period,
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the specific performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled in an advantageous state by operating it,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the movement of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first movement of the movable body in the specific performance (see FIG. 125);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
Even if a crack precursor image in the first crack mode or the second crack mode is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
The image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode or the second crack mode is not displayed is displayed with the first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed in the second visibility over a predetermined range. is displayed with the first visibility over different specific ranges (see FIGS. 102(E), (F), FIG. 104(C), FIG. 120, and FIG. 121),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. Moreover, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the crack precursor image differs depending on the type of crack mode, even if the same crack precursor image is displayed, it gives a suitably different impression and improves the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view in FIG. 104(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The corresponding image when the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 104(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image in the first crack mode (see FIG. 121);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can show a difference in the way the crack precursor image is presented, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The visibility of the background image differs between when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack mode has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack mode.
The degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed than when the first type of crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed. High (see Figures 101 to 103, Figures 119 and 120),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. In addition, players will start to pay attention to the type of crack precursor image in the second crack mode, and similarly, even if the performance displays a crack precursor image, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the enjoyment of the game. can be increased.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
The background that is displayed below the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first type of second crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed. Image visibility is different (see Figures 102 and 101),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the crack precursor images different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can commonly display an effect image of a specific color,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second timing predetermined effect (see FIGS. 102 and 101),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of a compatible image that supports variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in the special display layer,
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed in a second predetermined display layer that has a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a second crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the change effect can be executed (see FIGS. 102 to 104, FIG. 120, FIG. 121, and FIG. 148),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect that displays the first crack precursor image and the second predetermined effect that displays the second crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, so that the game can be played at various timings. Furthermore, even if the crack precursor image is displayed in the same way, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, giving suitably different impressions and increasing the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change performance is a performance in which a predetermined object image is displayed, and the predetermined object image performs an action that acts on the corresponding display to change the display mode of the corresponding display,
The predetermined object image can be displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 148);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect to the minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-2 is
In response to the movement of the predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see FIG. 148);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be suitably executed even while the second predetermined effect is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a first predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
A special performance can be executed after the second predetermined performance is executed,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The display mode is different between the fragment image in the first predetermined effect and the fragment image in the second predetermined effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes an image in a suggestive manner that suggests that a special performance will be performed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined effect is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined effect (see FIGS. 102, 120, 125, 149, and 150);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, and the relevance between the fragment image in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter can be increased, the same can be achieved. Even an effect in which a fragment image is displayed can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
There are 1st special performance and 2nd special performance.
When the second special performance is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the first special performance is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special performance will be performed, and a second suggestion mode that suggests that the second special performance will be performed (FIG. 149, FIG. 150, 151),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible,
More fragment images in the transmission mode are displayed than fragment images in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 151).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-2 is
The debris image is capable of performing rotational movements;
In the second predetermined effect, the amount of rotational movement is greater in the fragment image in the transparent mode than in the fragment image in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 151),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed,
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 150);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 137(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 137(B1)). It is a production that includes
The execution period of the first stage effect is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first aspect (see FIGS. 125 and 137),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a suitable crack pattern can be realized by creating a reservoir for cracks through the front stage rendering and giving a sense of speed to the crack image in the first aspect.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 137(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 137(B1)). It is a production that includes
The total period of the period in which the broken image is displayed in the first mode and the period in which it is displayed in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage effect (see FIGS. 125 and 137),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period during which the crack image is in the first mode and the second mode is made longer than the execution period of the first stage effect, thereby giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the display period of the cracked image.
It is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the cracked image over a second period after the first period,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 118 to 128, Figures 75 to 138),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image has the role of hiding the first displayed portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling its role, prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means displays the effect image when displaying the cracked image of the first aspect, and hides the effect image at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second aspect (FIGS. 118 to 128, (see Figures 75 to 138),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 136(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 136(B1)). It is a production that includes
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIGS. 124 and 136);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 75(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 75(B1)). It is a production that includes
The specific effect is to change the cracked image from the third mode to the fourth mode (FIGS. 136(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the third mode (FIG. 136(B1)). It is a production that includes
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image of the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( (See FIG. 120, FIG. 124, FIG. 75, FIG. 136, FIG. 140(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in a normal state, and after displaying the cracked image in the first mode (FIG. 75 (B1)), the cracked image is changed from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 75(B1)). 75 (B2) to (B5)),
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a production that includes changing the appearance (Fig. 136 (B2) to (B5)),
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image in the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image in the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( 87 to 89, FIG. 120, FIG. 124, FIG. 75, FIG. 136, and FIG. 140(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
The background image can be displayed in a display layer that has a lower priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding variable display in a display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific brightness data table,
Light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table until a specific timing in the display period of the broken image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a brightness data table corresponding to the background image (Fig. 118 to FIG. 120, see FIG. 123),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission control of the light emitting means can be suitably performed when a broken image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 118 to 124);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and outputs a sound corresponding to the broken image when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern. outputs a sound to notify that it is being controlled (see Figure 128),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions depending on the gaming state.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 125),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The sound output means is
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack precursor image is displayed,
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed,
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 145),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in conjunction with the movement display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When a crack precursor image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image,
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 145);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the operation speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different,
In the second pattern, since the amount of variation is 0, the operation speed of the third size fragment image and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern is common ( (see Figures 130 and 131),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images falling somewhat slowly and quickly, creating a cracking pattern that shows realistic movement. The second pattern can be used when you want, and the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way and falls in the same way regardless of the size, so you can select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. I can do it.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The fragment image is displayed in a manner that it falls after the display starts,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The speed at which the debris images fall differs due to the different settings of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 130 and 131).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images fall, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
Since the setting of the gravity direction is different between the first pattern and the second pattern, the direction in which the fragment image moves and is displayed is different (see FIGS. 130 and 131).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the directions in which the fragment images travel, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter (see FIGS. 130 and 131),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed and a common part is created for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is different to construct a variety of patterns, making it stable and versatile. It is possible to construct a display pattern of fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter,
The value of the first parameter is different between the second pattern and the third pattern, and the value of the second parameter is common (see FIGS. 130 and 131),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images by creating common parts for fragment images in each pattern and configuring them with different parameter values. .

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern ( (See Figures 87, 89, 102 to 104),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when displaying a cracked image in the normal state and when displaying a cracked image in the special state.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means are
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
An effect image is displayed when displaying the cracked image in the first mode, and the effect image is hidden at a timing before displaying the cracked image in the second mode (FIG. 87, FIG. 89, FIG. 102, 103),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The cracked image displayed according to the first pattern and the cracked image displayed according to the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The crack images displayed by the first pattern and the crack images displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see FIGS. 87, 89, and 102 to 104).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by the display pattern of the cracked image that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (FIG. 84, (See FIG. 86(C), FIG. 87, FIG. 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the broken image, it is possible to draw more attention to the display pattern of the broken image.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The first type of fragment image is a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIGS. 137 and 151).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The display mode is different between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image,
The display period of the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 137 and 151),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The amount of debris images displayed in the first area, which is the display area where the movable body does not overlap, is larger than the fragment image displayed in the second area, which is the display area where the movable body overlaps (FIG. 137, (see Figure 151),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragments can be suitably displayed while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves from a first area, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, to a second area, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps. ,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 137 and 151).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images that do not enter the area where the movable body overlaps make it possible to recognize that it has broken, and by preparing fragment images that pass through the area where the movable body overlaps, it is possible to create a dynamic image. It is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see FIGS. 137 and 151);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means, the fragment image can be suitably displayed so as not to miss the fragment image.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of first type fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image requires a shorter period of time to be hidden in the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 106 and 107);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of displaying the fragment image.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, it is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, it is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different (see Figures 102, 103, and 108),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a specific character appears in common in the display patterns of a plurality of cracked images, the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed in a third display layer that has a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a fourth display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The display means are
When displaying a first type of cracked image according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a predetermined timing after displaying the first type of cracked image. As shown,
When displaying a second type of cracked image according to the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a specific timing after displaying the second type of cracked image. display (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 108),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the fragment image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of second type fragment images are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner of moving while changing from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without a change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by changing the speed at which the fragment image moves depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment image.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is different depending on when a cracked image is displayed using the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed using the second pattern (see FIGS. 102, 103, 106, and 107). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, expectations for the specific character are increased, and interest is improved by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. Information images and time-saving remaining displays that indicate the remaining number of time-savings are displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the effect images (object images) such as characters, so that the effect images overlap and are stored in the first hold memory. While this prevents the visibility of the number, the number of secondary storage memories, small designs, and error displays from deteriorating, the decoration design is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the production image. It may also be possible to prevent the visibility of the performance image from decreasing due to overlapping symbols.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol holding memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a holding display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability change state. If it is in the state, it is a display area that displays a pending display according to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and an active display according to the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. This is a display area that displays an active display.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 59). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 59), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 58) that operates according to the performance, and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 93). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 59).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 59).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 59, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 006SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on reception of the payout signal. The device 006SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 006SG030 includes a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the firing device 006SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. Further, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 006SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the firing device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, so these are stored in the VRAM area. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area is arranged. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower, and the images in the higher layer image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and the images in the lower layer image drawing area are set higher in display priority. The lower the display priority is set in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 61, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as a layer 1 image, and a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as a layer 2 image. , a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as a layer 3 image, and a layer 4 for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301 etc.) to be described later as a layer 4 image. In order to draw and arrange a glass plate image 006SG301A as a crack target image displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as an image of layer 5 in the image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 generated when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a motion effect image, which will be described later as a layer 6 image, and a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303, which will be described later as a layer 7 image. Image drawing area, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation promotion images to be described later as layer 8 images, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display) as layer 9 images. A layer 9 image drawing area, a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and a right-handed hitting notification image are arranged as the layer 10 image. ing. Further, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and arranged in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that a crack has appeared in the display area of the image display device 5 due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. , the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and arranged in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that the display area of the image display device 5 is broken. Further, the broken image 006SG302 is an image that is displayed with a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A changed in order to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. be.

The glass plate image 006SG301 includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect A, which will be described later. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, this is an image that is hidden at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301A includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect, which will be described later. It is also an image (broken target image) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, a first continuous cracking performance, a second continuous cracking performance, a dialogue preview performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, The start timing of the cracking effect in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A is invisible to the player due to the display of white-out image 006SG303. . For this reason, in the present embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 in which the crack is displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so that it cannot be assumed from the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to realize the cracking (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302), and it is possible to strongly impress the player with the cracking effect.

In this embodiment, by superimposing each image drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the layer 1 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are set to have higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area are drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest image displayed in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5. (priority display), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5 above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (priority display). The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, The image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and is drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image display device 5 is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. In the image display device 5, the image is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. This is an image that is displayed in the upper layer (displayed with priority). Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is displayed in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. It is an image (prioritized display). Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background, which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), and super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be drawn. , In the layer 1-3 image drawing area, it is possible to draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), which will be described later. The image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is a layer 1-3 image. The image has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area is compared to the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This is an image whose display priority on the image display device 5 is lower than that of the image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 60(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 63(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (low probability high base state, time saving state), and a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state). The third gaming state designation command corresponds to the base state and variable probability state. Note that the high probability/high base state may simply be referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH indicates the result of determining whether the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)" as the winning determination result. This is a variable category command.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 63(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passing notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 64, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 65 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data that is assigned. In the display result determination table, 22 shows that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, pachinko play rr is compared to the probability (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment) of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when the pachinko game is in a time-saving state (low probability state). Therefore, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and controlling it to a jackpot gaming state increases (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 66(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is set to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 66(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' which transition to a high probability high base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' which transition to a low probability high base state with only time saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a gaming state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of jackpot states where the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B) show variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the display results are variable depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). Among the cases in which the result is a "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case in which it is "reach", and the case in which the variable display result is a "jackpot" A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in accordance with the above. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a pseudo continuous performance including a temporary stop of decorative symbols and a variable display again is executed once as a super reach variation pattern during variable display. After that, the super reach α reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the reach effect is executed via the normal reach Variable patterns in which the super reach β reach effect is executed and the variable display result is a miss or jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3), and the normal reach and super reach α reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. A reach effect of super reach β is executed via the effect, and variable patterns (PA2-4, PB1-4) are provided in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach performance of super reach α in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach β corresponds to the strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the reach effect of super reach γ is executed via normal reach as a super reach variation pattern. A variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-6, PB1-6), a variation pattern in which the super reach δ reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2- 7, PB1-7) is provided. In addition, the reach performance of super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach δ corresponds to strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

As shown in FIG. 67, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 68(A) to 68(D), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the special symbol that executes the variable display is suspended. If the number of memories (number of reserved memories of the same type) is less than 1, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table A for failure and the value of the random number MR3, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol to be variable displayed is determined. If there are two pieces, a variation pattern is determined based on the determination table B and the random value MR3, and if the number of special symbols to be stored in variable display is three, there is a variation pattern for a miss. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Further, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss and the value of the random number MR3. As shown in FIGS. 68(E) and 68(F), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the random value MR3 are A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3. Decide on a pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the variation pattern determination table A for miss is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is changed to a non-reach miss without shortening. The fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) is determined, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) that is outside the normal reach, and the value of the random number MR3 is 901. If it is within the range of ~970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo-continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971. If it is within the range of ~990, the fluctuation pattern will be determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be determined. The pattern is determined to be a variable pattern (PA2-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, and then the super reach β is off via the normal reach and the super reach α.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(B), when the variation pattern determination table B for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700. (PA1-2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After executing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(C), when the variation pattern determination table C for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750. (PA1-3), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After performing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(D), when the variation pattern determination table D for miss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is changed to the short non-reach variation pattern. (PA1-4), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern (PA2-5), and the value of random number MR3 is between 551 and 550. If it is within the range of 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a normal reach fluctuation pattern. (PA2-5), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) in which the super reach γ is off via the normal reach, If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-7) in which the super reach δ is off via the normal reach.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(E), when jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the fluctuation pattern (PB1 -2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that will lead to a super reach β jackpot via normal reach, and the random number If the value of MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be determined as a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that will become a jackpot with Super Reach β via Normal Reach and Super Reach α after performing pseudo-continuous performance twice. do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(F), when jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is changed to the non-reach jackpot variation pattern ( PB1-5), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via normal reach, and If the value of numerical value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a ratio of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the determination ratio of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns may be made different depending on the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 59 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151B allows execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball by the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The normal figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 006SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 006SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 006SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 stores various data tables used to control the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 has a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 70(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 006SG191, a performance control timer setting section 006SG192, a performance control counter setting section 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 006SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 006SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 006SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 006SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 006SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 70(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 006SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (the A set of four commands, ie, a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variable category command, are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, pending storage number notification commands, and symbol designation commands. , a storage area (entry) is secured for storing variable category commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, there is a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, and a continuous winning effect that will be described later. A storage area is provided for each storage area (entry) so that a continuous cracking effect flag that can specify whether ) are secured for each.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if execution of the hold display effect is not determined, "0" corresponding to the normal hold display display pattern is stored in the hold display flag, and the hold display effect is When it is decided to execute the effect, "1" (square (◇) )) or “2” (star (☆)) is set. After the pending display effect determination process is executed, the pending display update process described later is further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are changed to display modes according to each pending display flag (for example, the value of the pending display flag is If it is "0", a white circle (○) is displayed, if the value of the pending display flag is "1", a square (◇) is displayed, and if the value of the pending display flag is "2", a star (☆) is displayed. In addition, the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is set in the continuous breaking effect setting process (see FIG. 83), which will be described later.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are stored in order.

The command stored in the start winning command reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 70(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 70(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 71, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 72 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the gaming state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is performed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 73. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (006SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS102 (006SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (006SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way and the starting opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (006SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then, for example, sets the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 to the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 by storing it in the area (006SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize)
FIG. 75(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 74 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state is controlled by special symbol normal processing described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to do so. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 006SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 75(A), the CPU 103 first determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state is specified (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the variable probability state (high probability, high base state) when the variable probability flag is on, and the time saving state (low probability, high base state) when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It is sufficient to specify that the state is the normal state (low certainty base state) when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of step 006SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 65 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 74 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table selected by the process of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 006SGS123; N), in response to the variable display result being "miss", The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command, is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. It is determined whether there is one (Step 006SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, a deviation variation pattern determination table B and a deviation variation pattern determination table C are prepared according to the number of pending memories. are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 68, among these fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss has a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 660 are assigned within the range that the random number MR3 can take, and in the variation pattern judgment tables B and C for a loss, the random number MR3 for judgment of the variation pattern is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 700 and from 1 to 750 are assigned to each of the possible ranges. On the other hand, in the losing variation pattern determination tables A to C, determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 006SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 75(A), the jackpot will be determined. The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. If it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command is executed, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command is executed (step 006SGS133). A pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the process of step 006 SGS135, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high If it is a certain high base state), it is sufficient to set the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

In the process of step 006 SGS138, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are used to determine the fluctuation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3. (Step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is commonly "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach) are established, and a random value is set. It is sufficient if it can be determined based on MR3 whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 006SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 73 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 76, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending storage number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 65 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state and low probability high base state in this embodiment), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is between 1 and 219. If it falls within the range, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be a "miss".

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 006SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of ``A'', ``Probable variable jackpot B'', and ``Probable variable jackpot C'' matches (Step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing of step 006SGS155, the process advances to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006 SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) in advance, and the result of determining the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 73 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 77, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a loss, if the gaming state is normal and the number of special symbols reserved for executing variable display is 1, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected, and the gaming state is normal. If the state and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display are 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and select the state and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3. If the game state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, a loss variation pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the gaming state is normal, jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is time saving or probability variable, jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected. do.

Then, by referring to the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table based on numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation, etc., multiple types of fluctuation patterns are generated. (Step 006SGS162).

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS162, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS163, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of special symbols (step 006SGS164). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, the special symbol variable display time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step 006SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and then the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The specification command, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variation start command, second variation start command, and variation pattern specification command are sent. , the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 73 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), it is determined in step 006SGS191 whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), check whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. judge. If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS192;N). 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS194), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command is performed according to the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 73 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time to display the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag and time saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). Further, the time saving number counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 006 SGS216).

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 updates the image display device 5 according to execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or reach effect described later) or a change in the game state during variable display. It is possible to execute control to update the displayed background image.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and in addition, in a state where the menu screen is displayed, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration performance may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 80 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 81, the production control CPU 120 first determines the display mode of the pending display displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. A display effect determination process is executed (step S160). Further, a pending display update process (step S161) is executed to update the display mode of the pending display in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F. Note that the pending display update process is also a process for starting anew the display of the pending display or active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the pending display effect determination process. After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Hold display performance determination process)
FIG. 82 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the pending display and active display in the pending display effect shown in FIG. 81. In the pending display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in FIG. 70(B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, specify the variable display result from the symbol designation command in that entry and the variable category from the variable category command in that entry, and then combine these specified variable display results with the variable category. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a hold display effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of a hold display or an active display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 82, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 5% not to execute the pending display effect, and at a rate of 25% it is decided to execute the held display effect in the effect pattern α. Then, at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 5% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, at a rate of 0%, execution of the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is other (normal reach), 75% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect with the effect pattern α. is determined, and the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined to be executed at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag of the entry as " If the value of the pending display flag of the entry is set to 1, and the performance pattern α of the pending display notice effect is set to ``1'', and the performance pattern β of the pending display notice effect is set. If execution has been determined, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

In this embodiment, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as described above, the production control CPU 120 performs the pending display updating process (step S61). ), if the value of the pending display flag is set to 0, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag will be displayed as a white circle (○), and the pending display If "1" is set as the value of the flag, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag. In this case, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

Due to these settings, if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star shape in display pattern B, or if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white circle. If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than that of display pattern B, and if the pending display or active display is displayed in a white star shape in display pattern B, then the pending display or active display is changed to display pattern A. Since the proportion of jackpot gaming state control (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when displayed as a white rectangle, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, that is, whether or not the pending display effect is executed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance pattern.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 006SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern, a combination in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, a combination such as "767", etc. Determine the combination (missing symbol) that will result in the out-of-reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 performs a continuous cracking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous cracking performance during variable display, and a dialogue preview performance setting for executing a dialogue preview performance during variable display. processing (step 006SGS278), background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), A cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in effect during variable display is executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts a process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 006SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command; however, the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous cracking effect setting process)
FIG. 84(A) is a flowchart showing the continuous crack effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the continuous breaking performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), refer to the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A and check whether there is an entry for which the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (“0” or “1”) is not set. (Step 006SGS312), and determines whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous crack effect flag is set (Step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318, and if there is an entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), Based on the symbol designation command and variable category command stored in the entry, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS314). In addition, in the continuous cracking effect in the normal state in this embodiment, by executing the variable display multiple times for a variable display that has not yet been executed, the variable display result of the target variable display becomes a jackpot. This is an effect that suggests that something will happen (see Figure 87).

When the gaming state is the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. Then, it is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect at a rate of 80%. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 80% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 20% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it is determined at a rate of 60% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 40% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, in step 006SGS314, the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous cracking performance at a rate of 30%, if the variable display result is a jackpot, and at a rate of 70%. The execution of the continuous cracking effect is determined at the rate of . When the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 30% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 40% not to perform the continuous break effect, and at a rate of 60% it is determined to execute the continuous break effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state when the continuous breaking performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance in the process of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it is determined to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous breaking effect flag of the entry to "1", proceeds to step 006SGS318, and decides not to execute the continuous breaking effect. If it is determined (step 006SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets "0" as the value of the continuous break effect flag of the entry, and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which "1" is set as the value of the consecutive breaking performance flag, that is, whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance. (Step 006SGS318). If there is no entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous breaking effect setting process is ended, and "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag. If there is an entry (Step 006SGS318; Y), it is further determined whether the entry whose continuous winning effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, the start winning reception command. It is determined whether the entry is stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), it is determined that the variable display is not the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect. The execution setting of the first continuous cracking effect according to the above is performed, and the continuous breaking effect setting process is completed (step 006SGS320), and the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display. If so (Step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (Step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous cracking effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), 006SGS321;N) sets the execution of the second continuous cracking effect according to the fact that the variable display is the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect, and ends the continuous breaking effect setting process (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous cracking effect when the gaming state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect is executed in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the continuous breaking effect. do. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous cracking effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second continuous cracking effect will not be executed; In the case of a variable display with a variable pattern, a second continuous crack effect is executed.

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and performs a continuous breaking performance setting process. (Step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined. It is sufficient to determine the highest ratio (execution ratio of consecutive cracking effects for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute a continuous breaking effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, the setting for executing the continuous breaking effect (first continuous breaking effect) once or twice in the variable display is set. , and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is normal reach or super reach, the first consecutive cracking effect will be executed twice in the variable display, and the second consecutive effect will be executed once after the two first consecutive breaking effects. All you have to do is set up the execution of the cracking effect.

In other words, the continuous break performance in the time saving state and variable probability state of this embodiment is a performance that can be executed multiple times in one variable display, and is a performance that suggests that the reach will depend on the number of executions. ing.

(Speech preview production setting process)
FIG. 85(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue preview effect setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview effect setting process is finished, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach, normal reach, or super reach. If yes (step 006SGS331; N), the execution or non-execution of dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 85(B), if the variable pattern is non-reachable and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and the performance pattern A of the dialogue preview performance is determined. 30% of the time. In addition, if the variation pattern is normal reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 35%. , the execution of dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable pattern is super reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%. Then, the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to perform the line preview performance, and at a rate of 5% whether or not to perform the line preview performance in production pattern A. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the performance pattern C of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 85(C), production pattern A displays the line "Chance!?" in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking production executed as part of the speech preview production. The performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Chi hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance, The performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "It's super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance.

In addition, regarding this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during the variable display, the control is made to be in a jackpot game state more than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (non-execution). The percentage of Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set to be highest when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern C, and when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is set to be the lowest when executed in A > non-execution).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 83 will be explained. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2. -7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-7. The fluctuation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3. , PB1-4, or PB1-7, refer to the reception command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning.

When the gaming state is in the normal state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that indicates a jackpot, the command is displayed as shown in FIG. 86(A). Then, it is decided at a rate of 60% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect while not executing the change of the background image (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2-4. , PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with failure pattern is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of background image change and execution of background change effect with success pattern is determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the success pattern of background change effect A is executed, the variation pattern of the variable display is If it is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that will result in a jackpot, the background image It is decided at a rate of 50% not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect, and to not perform the change of the background image and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 5%. .

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory that will become a jackpot, then FIG. 86(A) As shown, it is decided at a rate of 30% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect without executing the change of the background image (change of the variable display concerned). If the pattern is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2. -4, PB1-2, PB1-4, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect B) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the success pattern of background change effect A, If the variation pattern is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state/variable probability state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory of a jackpot, the background image Deciding not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image, and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect is determined. execution (if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 80%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the background change performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the background change effect in any of the effect patterns, the execution settings are made according to the effect pattern of the background change effect, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display during effect processing according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it. Further, when it is determined to change the background image (when it is determined to execute the background change effect in a successful pattern), the background image change setting is performed. Note that the background image may be changed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in FIG. 80.

(Reach suggestion effect setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in FIG. 83 will be explained. In the reach suggestion performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the execution or non-execution of the reach suggestion performance and the reach suggestion performance are determined according to the variation pattern of the variable display. Decide on the performance pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86(B), if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the failure pattern of the reach suggestion effect is determined. The execution rate is decided at a rate of 20%. Additionally, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the reach suggestion effect in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. . In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach-suggesting performance is executed, the reach (normal reach or super-reach reach performance) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach-suggesting performance is not executed. . Furthermore, when a reach-suggesting performance is executed, the player is informed that the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a failure pattern and does not result in a reach, while the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. The player is informed that the game is reachable by executing the game.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the reach-suggesting performance in any of the performance patterns, the execution settings are made according to the performance pattern of the reach-suggesting performance, and the reach-suggesting performance is executed in the variable display performance process according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in FIG. 83 will be explained. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. Determine whether or not. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, PB1-7, cut-in is performed according to the variable display result of the variable display. Decide whether or not to perform the performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance.

For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. 86(C), if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the cut-in effect is performed. Execution in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution in production pattern Y of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 20%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 20%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 70%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set so that the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern Y, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern X. (Whether or not cut-in performance is executed and the expected jackpot of the performance pattern: performance pattern Y > performance pattern X > cut-in performance not executed). In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the variable display result is a failure, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 70%. %, and execution of the cut-in effect in production pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 15%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 75%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the cut-in performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Note that the cut-in performance in this embodiment is a performance that displays different images depending on the performance pattern (for example, an image of the text "Heat!!", an image of the text "Chance!", etc.), This is a performance that differs in the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled depending on which image is displayed (which performance pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, the performance pattern X is This is a production pattern that displays an image of the text "Chance!", and production pattern Y is a production pattern that displays an image of the text "Heat!!").

In addition, when it is decided to execute a cut-in effect using any of the effect patterns, the execution settings are made according to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display process according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see FIGS. 88 and 112), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect is As the performance pattern of the performance, a performance pattern with a cracking performance and a performance pattern without a cracking performance may be provided. For example, the performance pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern accompanied by a breaking performance, and the performance pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern without a breaking performance. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is a effect pattern that does not involve a crack effect, when the effect pattern for the cut-in effect is determined to be the effect pattern X, the display mode of the band-shaped image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is changed. The display color of the image may be determined from a plurality of aspects depending on the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined at different ratios from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss). By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a cracking effect is included as a cut-in effect, and if a cracking effect is not included as a cut-in effect, an image that is further displayed is It is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode.

(Explanation of production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a continuous break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect, a plurality of effects can be executed during variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, when the game state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the background change effect B. , a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, and a result notification performance. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the first consecutive cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cut are performed. It is possible to perform in-effect and result notification effects. Note that the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect may be provided as effects that cannot be performed in a normal state and can only be performed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. In this case, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determined ratios shown in FIGS. 84(B) and 86(C). In this way, it is possible to perform different types of cracking effects in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, in the first continuous cracking effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 has a transmittance of less than 100%. The cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be broken instead, is broken is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and is not dependent on the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, etc. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking range is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the first continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, while the first continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display before the variable display to be read ahead, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, it may be executed multiple times during the execution of the first variable display. This is a performance that is likely to occur, and is also a performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of times it is executed.

The second continuous crack effect is a crack effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the second continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is a effect that may be executed in the variable display of the prefetch target.

The dialogue preview performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance in which a cracking effect is performed, in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is the glass plate image This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301). In addition, the dialogue preview effect is a effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. At the same time, one of the words ``Chance!'', ``Hot!'', or ``Super Hot!'' is displayed in the cracked area (target area of the cracking effect), and the jackpot game state is controlled according to the displayed line. This is an effect in which the percentage of winning is different (the displayed dialogue suggests the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level)).

Background change effect A includes a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect A is a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. There are cases in which the process is executed, and cases in which the process is executed in a failure pattern in which the background image does not change because the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken).

In the background change effect B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is created in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect B is a successful pattern in which cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. If the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage but no cracks in the second stage occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, or if the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage and the second stage. There are cases in which failure patterns (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) are executed in which the background image does not change because the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break even though cracks occur in the first step.

In the pseudo continuous effect, when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a specific combination during variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which the re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301, is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed by the movement of the movable body 32. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect is executed up to two times during one variable display, and as the first pseudo continuous effect, the color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and The color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A as the second pseudo-reaction is different. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (which is controlled by the jackpot game state). The ratio is set to be high. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this embodiment, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) is determined by the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the breaking performance executed as a part of the pseudo-continuous performance. It is now possible to make suggestions to people.

The reach-suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect in which a reach may be established by executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead breaks. The reach suggestion effect is executed in a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and a reach is established when the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. There are two cases: a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken) even though a crack has occurred due to the action of the character, and a reach is not established. be.

The weak development effect is a glass plate image 006SG301 whose transmittance is less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 after the normal reach reach effect, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. By executing a cracking effect in which 006SG301A cracks, if the gaming state is in the normal state, the player is notified of the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach α, and the gaming state is in the time saving state or the variable probability state. If so, this is a performance that notifies the player of the transition to the super reach γ reach performance. Further, the weak development effect is also a effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks without any cracks occurring due to the action of the character.

In the strong development performance A, when the gaming state is the normal state, after the reach performance of super reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the corresponding This is an effect that notifies the shift to the reach effect of super reach β by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32. If the state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, after the normal reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by executing a crack effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development effect B is also a effect in which a crack occurs without any action of the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, the glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. By executing the cracking effect, this is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of super reach β, and the glass plate image 006SG301 can be replaced without cracking regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. This is an effect in which the entire displayed glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The cut-in performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance in which a cracking effect is performed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks without any cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. . In addition, in the cut-in effect, different cut-in images are displayed depending on the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled varies depending on the displayed cut-in image (display This is an effect that suggests the rate (jackpot expectation level) of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the cut-in image that is displayed.

The result notification performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to urge the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance that may notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by executing the cracking performance. In addition, the result notification performance is a success pattern that notifies that the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks after a crack occurs due to the operation of the movable body, and that the state is controlled to be a jackpot game state. In the case where the movable body does not operate and cracks do not occur in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), the jackpot game state is not controlled. That is, there are cases where the execution is performed using a failure pattern that notifies the variable display result that it is a failure. In addition, the result notification performance of this embodiment is a variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are variable patterns of non-reach jackpot or non-reach, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. (See FIG. 93).

(Production timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect in this embodiment will be explained. First, to explain the variable display when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display in the order of the first continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect, without overlapping the effect periods.

As shown in FIG. 90(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are variable patterns of shortened and non-reaching deviations, the first continuous cracking effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display. It is executable.

As shown in FIG. 90(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach jackpot and normal reach deviation, the dialogue notice is announced after a while from the start of the variable display. Performance, background change performance A, reach suggestion performance, and normal reach reach performance can be executed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods.

As shown in FIG. 90(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach α jackpot and super reach α, 2 consecutive cracking effects, background change effect B, first pseudo continuous effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and super reach α reach effect can be performed individually without overlapping production periods. . In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach α, the result notification effect is executed in overlap with the reach effect of the super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 91(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, dialogue preview effects, background change effects A, reach suggestion effects, normal reach effects, weak development effects, super reach α reach effects, strong development effects A, and super reach β reach effects in this order. can be executed individually without duplication. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

In particular, the characters displayed in the background change effect A start to be displayed after the display of the lines in the line preview effect (display of the broken area of the display area of the image display device 5) becomes hidden. To prevent a decrease in the performance effect of each cracking effect due to the player's attention being dispersed to a plurality of cracking effects, since a new cracking effect will not occur in a place where a cracking effect has already occurred. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 91(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, background change effect B, 1st pseudo continuous effect, 2nd pseudo continuous effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, super reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, super reach β reach Each performance can be executed individually in the order of performance without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, a variable display in which background change effect B is executed and a variable display in which dialogue preview effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and dialogue preview effect may be effects that can be executed during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case, when background change effect B and dialogue preview effect are executable during the same variable display, if it is decided to execute background change effect B, background change effect B and The execution periods of the dialogue preview performances may be set so as not to overlap. By doing this, for example, by executing the cracking effect as a dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as the background change effect B, the player who has executed the cracking effect as the background change effect B. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified when the background image changes.

Next, variable display when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 92(A) and 92(B), when a variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach variation pattern, it is a non-reach variation pattern and a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. When it is decided to execute the continuous breaking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot When it is decided to execute the background change effect as a prefetch for PB1-7, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, targeting the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, as a pre-reading preview effect, an effect is performed in which a crack gradually widens in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display before the variable display. However, it may also be possible to perform a performance (so-called immediate win performance, special continuous crack performance) in which a breaking performance is executed and a jackpot symbol is displayed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5. Incidentally, since this performance is an instant hit performance, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as a breaking performance may be made faster than the moving speed of the fragments displayed as other breaking performances.

As shown in FIGS. 92(C) and 92(D), when variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach variation pattern, it is a non-reach variation pattern or a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. When it is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and the super reach δ When it is decided to execute the background change effect as a prefetch for PB1-7, which is the variable pattern of the jackpot, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 93(A), regarding the case where variable display is executed in PA1-6 which is a non-reach variation pattern, when it is subject to continuous cracking effect and the variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot When the execution of the background change effect is not decided as a look-ahead for PB1-7, and when the variable display is executed at PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, After the first continuous crack performance is individually performed three times from the start timing, a result notification performance is further performed.

As shown in FIG. 93(B), when a variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variation pattern outside of the normal reach, the production except for the variable display of decorative symbols from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing is It is not executed, and only the normal reach effect is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 93(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach γ jackpot or super reach γ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. The effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are not executed until the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach effect, weak development effect, and super reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping production periods. There is. In addition, during the execution period of the super reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the super reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 93(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach δ jackpot or super reach δ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. Background change effect A can be executed during the period up to the timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing, the reach performance of normal reach, the strong development performance A, and the reach performance of super reach δ can be performed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach performance of the super reach δ, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are individually executed overlapping with the reach performance of the super reach δ.

(Flow of production in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach α will be explained based on FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach α is started, the first background image (for example, An image representing a daytime city scene) is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second continuous crack effect is started. Specifically, when the second continuous crack effect is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image changes to a cracked state. After this is displayed (see FIG. 94 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image, which replaces the crack precursor image, is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) in the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the type of displayed character image. It is suggested (see FIG. 94 (A3)). After the second continuous crack effect ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the second continuous breaking performance, a dialogue preview performance is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview effect is started (see FIG. 94 (A4)). The operation promotion image is composed of a button image imitating the push button 31B, a character image "Press!!", an indicator image indicating the operation validity period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 94 (A5)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and multiple fragment images are scattered. A cracking effect is performed. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a text image "Chance!?" will be displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the content of the displayed text image. (See FIG. 94 (A6)). After the dialogue preview performance ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the dialogue preview performance, background change performance A is started. Specifically, after the effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 94 (A7)). (See A8). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, a kicking motion of the character), and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to become cracked. After the image is displayed in this manner (see FIG. 94 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 94 (A10)). reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as a background image (Fig. 94 (A11 )reference). After the background change effect A ends, variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect A ends, the reach suggestion effect is started. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the action of the character image (for example, the character hits the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel), and a crack precursor image is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the first crack mode by displaying (see FIG. 94 (A13)), the character image moves (for example, the character uses a gavel in the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R). The crack precursor image changes from the first crack mode to the second crack mode as a result of the crack being displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image (see FIG. 94 (A14)), and furthermore, the character image (For example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the center decoration pattern display area 5C with a gavel) (as shown in FIG. 94 (A15), if a crack has been determined, a crack target is displayed instead of the crack precursor image). A cracking effect is performed in which the entire area of the image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 94 (A16)).

Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, decorative symbols with the same numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A17)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action (punching action) (see Figure 95 (A18)), and a crack is displayed instead of the crack precursor image without a crack being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 95 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, weak S reach performance A (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (A20) to (A22) in FIG. 95).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A is started. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the inner decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 95 (A23)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the movement of the glass falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a production position that overlaps with the approximate center position of the display screen, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. Instead, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 95 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed, and a strong S reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (Fig. 95 (A25) to (A27) )reference).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach effect, the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 95 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, the text image "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see Figure 95 (A29)) ). After the cut-in effect ends, the strong S reach effect is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, the result notification effect is started. Specifically, first, an image of the ally character delivering the final blow is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A30)), and then the ally character's actions are displayed in slow motion and the image fades out (FIG. 96). (See A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, after an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A32)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 moves on the display screen A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the movement of falling from the upper origin position to a predetermined production position between the origin position and the production position, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. As a result, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a manner in which the crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen (FIG. 96). (See A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined presentation position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a plurality of fragments are generated. A cracking effect in which the image scatters is performed (see FIG. 96 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the ally character has won the battle of the enemy character. Ru. In addition, the background image is displayed as a fifth background image 006SG085 for the jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-like image), and the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined luminescent color (e.g., rainbow) to produce a predetermined production effect. After a sound is output and it is announced that the jackpot game state is controlled (see FIG. 96 (A35)), the background image returns to the first background image and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See FIG. 96 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a missed display result, after the image of the enemy character's punch hitting the ally character is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move and the crack precursor image ( A glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and the display screen A gray image (effect image) is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 96 (A38)).

Next, after the white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A39)), as the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the fixed decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the ally It is reported that the character has lost the battle of the enemy character (FIG. 96 (A40)).Furthermore, after it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled, the background image returns to the first background image and the combination that is not a jackpot is announced. The determined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 96 (A41)).

(Flow of production in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 97 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the lower left of the crack precursor image. As a result, after the crack precursor image is displayed in a crack mode (see FIG. 97 (B2)), two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack mode of the crack precursor image is changed in stages. (see FIG. 97 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered. (See Figure 97 (B4)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 97 (B5)).

After the background change effect A is finished, the variable display is executed again, and after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 97 (B6)), in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern having the same number as the temporarily displayed decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode (see FIG. 97 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect B ends, a pseudo continuous effect is started. Specifically, in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, the pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is decelerated and displayed before the stop display position (Fig. 97 ( (See B8).

Next, after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and one of the crack precursor images is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack (see FIG. 97 (B10)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, when the movable body 32 is displayed from the origin position above the display screen). In response to the motion of falling to a presentation position that overlaps the approximate center position of the screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (Fig. 97 (See (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x2" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figures 97 (B12) to (B13)) .

In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo-continuation notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuation pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative pattern with the number one larger than the number is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the error is displayed (see FIG. 97 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-continuous performance of a triple pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous performance are displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is displayed. Deceleration is displayed before the stop display position (see FIG. 97 (B14)). After the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B15)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack (see FIG. 97 (B16)), the movable body 32 moves (for example, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position above the display screen to In response to the motion of falling to a presentation position that overlaps the approximately central position, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (FIG. 97 (B17) )reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x3" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figures 98 (B18) to (B19)) .

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a two-part pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a three-part pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is It is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 98 (B20)), and the decoration symbol with the same number as the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R, and it becomes N reach ( (See FIG. 98 (B21)), the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 98 (B22)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action (punching action) (see FIG. 98 (B23)), and a crack replaces the crack precursor image without a crack being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 98 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (B25) to (B26) in FIG. 98).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B is started. Specifically, when strong development effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack. After being displayed (see FIG. 98 (B27)), a crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack precursor image, is cracked and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 98 (B28)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the inner decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 98 (B29)), and then the reach title image is displayed. is displayed, and strong S reach effect B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 98 (B30)). Note that the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with higher expectations than the strong S reach effect A. Furthermore, since the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with a higher degree of expectation than the strong S reach effect A, the cut-in effect described later is more likely to be executed in the effect pattern Y. In other words, in the strong S reach effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 described later is more likely to be displayed than in the strong S reach effect A.

Strong S Reach Effect B is almost the same as Super Reach α's Strong S Reach Effect A, with the only difference being the type of enemy character, etc., so a detailed explanation of the flow until the end of the variable display will be omitted hereafter. .

(Examples of various effects)
Next, an example of the operation of the breaking effect in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 99 to 115.

In addition, an example of the expression showing the display mode used in the following explanation will be explained.

"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the image one frame before. display).

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 115, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular figures when viewed from the front. A numeric display section consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the pedestal section and the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" on the numeric display section. (all characters are omitted) is displayed, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information pedestal. and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section that is displayed so as to surround the numeral display section, character display section, and information display section (see FIG. 58, etc.).

Although a detailed explanation will not be provided, when the gaming state is in the high base state or in other production modes, decorative symbols whose display mode is different from the decorative symbols for the low base state described above are displayed in each decorative symbol display area. It may be possible to variably display 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a variable display mode of the decorative symbols for the low base state, a mode in which the decorative symbols are vertically scrolled from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been exemplified, but other variable display modes may also be used. The variable display mode may be different depending on the presentation mode.

In the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

The special figure pending storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 includes a first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 148) and a second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending. ) is displayed, and in the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen, an active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. Incidentally, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes.

<First continuous cracking performance and second continuous cracking performance>
Details of the operation examples of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect will be explained based on FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the first continuous crack effect. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the second continuous crack effect.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, a second When the continuous crack effect is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed at a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from the glass plate image 006SG301. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 99(B)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the second continuous cracking effect starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image which is the normal background image for the time saving state/probability variable state, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. be done.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken ( The glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken manner), and a cracking effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 99(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 99(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the whiteout image becomes visible. The display of 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 99(E)).

Thereafter, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314 that are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished. After being displayed (see FIG. 99(F)), the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see FIG. 99(G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed in the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range) In this case, the first visibility is displayed with higher visibility than the second visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the different types of characters that appear, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. do. In addition, in this embodiment, the example of the operation of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect was illustrated as being almost the same, but the example of the operation of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is May be different.

For example, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, the cracking pattern is a common cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction is the same. Then, in Fig. 99(B), the crack is displayed on the right side, while in Fig. 100(B), the crack is displayed on the left side, so that when the crack starts, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The position at which the display starts may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image Depending on the display mode, it may be suggested which of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is to be executed. Furthermore, the cracking patterns may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect. In particular, regarding the second continuous cracking effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect and a character voice corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the second continuous breaking effect, and both of them crack at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output together with the sound, the character voice may be output after the cracking sound is output at the display timing of the whiteout image 006SG303, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited. good.

<Speech preview production>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating details of an example of the operation of the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when a dialogue preview effect is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, a higher level than the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 101(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is hidden, and a layer higher than the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the 4-image drawing area, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, indicating that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 101(C)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken. A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 101(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 101(E)), and the transmittance reaches 100%. The display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 101(F)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, a message ``Chance!'' indicating the expectation of a jackpot is displayed. ?'' character image 006SG306 and a serif background image 006SG087 serving as its background are displayed (see FIG. 101(F)). Here, the serif background image 006SG087 and character image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the text image 006SG087 and the character image 006SG306 displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the first visibility. 1 background image 006SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the character image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 101(H)).

In addition, in FIG. 101(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack is added to a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301). Depending on the display mode of the effect image, it may be suggested which of the dialogue character images 006SG306 such as "Chance!?", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" will be displayed. In addition, the cracking pattern may be different depending on the type of serif character (such as the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302. Especially when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in slow motion to increase the attention level). ), and while using a common crack pattern, the location of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the closer to the center) and the range of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the wider the crack). You can change it. Furthermore, character voices corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305 may be output, and both may be output with a cracking sound at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303, or the crackling sound may be output at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output after the character voice is output, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
The details of the operation example of the background change effect A will be explained based on FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect A. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect A.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the background change effect A starts when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after being gradually enlarged (see FIGS. 102(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 fades out. The character image 006SG305 is displayed (see FIG. 102(D)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, if the background change effect A is started while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the time saving state Effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image which is the normal background image for the state/probability change state, and after being gradually enlarged and displayed, effect image 006SG320 is faded out and character image 006SG305 is displayed. is displayed.

Note that the effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 102(B) is an effect that stimulates whether or not the character image 006SG305 is displayed in FIG. 102(D). In the case of a failure pattern, the transition does not proceed to FIG. 102C, and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 is not displayed.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed on the near side. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack mode, a crack is displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301 in response to the kicking motion towards the glass plate image 006SG301. (See FIG. 102(E)), the crack gradually spreads radially and changes into a cracked state (see FIG. 102(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are , when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. By displaying, the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, the character image 006SG305 is displayed. In response to the kicking motion toward the front side, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack mode. After that, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a cracked appearance. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the 6th background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are: When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the cracks are displayed more conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 102(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIGS. 102(H) and 103(I)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 103(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 103(K)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and is replaced by the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the displayed glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time saving state/probability change state, becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, it is possible to make it look natural that the sixth background image has changed to the seventh background image. Therefore, background changes can be made to look natural.

Further, for example, it is possible to display a third background image (not shown) which is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082, and depending on the movement mode (actions such as punching and kicking) of the character image 006SG305. It may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed. Further, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect B.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), when background change effect B is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first background image 006SG081 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the upper layer 4 image drawing area, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 104(B)). Thereafter, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed at the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, and the crack appearance of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes in stages (see FIG. 104(C)). ).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are created by glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked manner. When it is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the crack appearance is displayed conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 104(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 is While being displayed using the second visibility, each crack display area 006SG324 is displayed using the first visibility, which is higher in visibility than the second visibility. In other words, the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, making it easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken and the layer A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the 5-image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 104(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 104(E)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 104(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 104(G)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected level of development of the production may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is easy to finish at the first stage (see Fig. 104(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is easy to finish at the second stage (see Fig. 104(C)). (see), and in the case of red, it is preferable that it is most likely to develop into a cracking effect compared to blue or green. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 121(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transmittance gradually increases and becomes invisible (fade-out display) when 1500 ms elapses from the start of background change effect B. As shown in FIG. 121(C), when the failure pattern 2 ends at the second stage, the transmittance may gradually increase and become invisible after 3000 ms have elapsed from the start of the background change effect B.

In addition, while background change effect B is being executed, change effects for active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than glass plate image 006SG301, are restricted, while glass plate image 006SG301 It may also be possible not to limit the effect using images (for example, mini-character images, etc.) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the layer image drawing area. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the cracking effect.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
The details of the operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained based on FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating details of a partial operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 105(A), after the pseudo-continuous effect has started, the pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C. When temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed from the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301. By displaying the cracks so as to spread radially, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. In addition, the decorative designs displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 105(B)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the motion of the movable body 32 to fall from the origin position to the production position is started, and in response to this motion, a whiteout image is created at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After 006SG303 is displayed (see FIG. 105(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 105(C)). (See D). In addition, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a glass plate image is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of 006SG301A is cracked and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image that is displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the beginning of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 105(E)). When the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG321 is displayed to spread from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area to spread from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (FIG. 105(F) ), see (G)).

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 has been displayed, the movable body 32 starts moving from the production position to the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is being displayed (see FIG. 105(G)). After all the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden, they are stopped at the presentation position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see FIG. 105(H)).

Note that even if the operation of returning the movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position to the origin position is started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished and then after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 is finished. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous display and variable display is started again, but the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed during the first variable display. The display color of the plate image 006SG301 is blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display is green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display is red. The display mode of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made to be different. Further, the crack pattern may be different, for example, the crack pattern in the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes gradually larger each time variable display is performed again.

Further, in this case, although the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times of re-variable display, it is preferable that the crack pattern is the same. In this way, by making the cracking pattern common in gaming machines that perform various breaking effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo continuous effect has been executed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the first re-variable display and the second re-variable display The display mode of the crack pattern may be made different between the variable display and the third re-variable display, such as the size of the fragment images 006SG302 being different, the number of displayed fragment images 006SG302 being different, and the moving speed of the fragment images 006SG302 being different. .

<Reach suggestion production>
Details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect will be explained based on FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 106(A), when the reach suggestion effect is started while variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the left ornamental symbol display area 5L is displayed as a decoration. After the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 106(B)), the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 106(C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the character image 006SG305 hits the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel. Accordingly, a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first crack mode, and an operation is performed in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Effect image 006SG323 is displayed (see FIG. 106(D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a gavel, a crack is displayed on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby changing the glass plate image 006SG301 into the second crack mode. At the same time, the motion effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 106(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the center decoration pattern display area 5C with a gavel (see FIG. 106(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After that (see FIG. 106(G)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 106(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 106(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A falls downward from the part where the crack is displayed. After being displayed, it will frame out and disappear. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106(H), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 107(I)). Then, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 107). J)), the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 107(K)).

In addition, in various performances accompanied by a cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of FIGS. After it is resolved and hidden, the presentation progresses (for example, progresses from a reach-suggesting presentation with a breaking presentation to a reaching presentation without a breaking presentation).

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected degree of reach development may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it is only necessary that the reach is more likely to be achieved when the effect image is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

In addition, in the case of a failure pattern, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the centerpiece design display area 5C with a gavel (see FIGS. 106(G) and (H)). , a disappointed character image 006SG305 is displayed in the area corresponding to the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and then the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, and the missing pattern stops. The variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the weak development effect.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state/variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is in the reach mode. When the weak development effect is started, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the character image 006SG305 is displayed at the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it. After (see FIG. 108(B)), after the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while being enlarged as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 108(C)) . The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, and then the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 108(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher (see FIG. 108(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 51(F)), when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 51(F)). 108(G)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the transition to the weak S reach effect occurs (see FIG. 108(H)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the process shifts to the weak S reach effect. In addition, in FIGS. 117 and 130 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is not transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is non-transparent. is displayed in a transparent mode (for example, transmittance of 70% or more) in FIGS. 136 (B1) to (B3), which will be described later, and then in FIGS. 136 (B4) and (B5). (for example, the transmittance is less than 10%). That is, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 136 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent manner, and at the second timing, corresponding to FIG. 136 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent manner. can do.

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the N reach effect develops into the weak S reach effect, it is possible to naturally show that the N reach effect image has changed to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088. Therefore, changes in the production can be seen without any discomfort.

<Strong development performance A>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect A will be explained based on FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing details of a partial operation example of strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), in the weak S reach effect, the development symbol with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development effect A is started, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position. At the same time as the action of falling to the production position is started, when this falling action is started, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 begins to fall (Fig. 109(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect is started.

In addition, when the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position as a preliminary performance before the cracking performance, and the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 , the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters (see FIG. 109(C)).

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and here, it is transparent until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the ratio remains at 0%, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 109(C)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 109(D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG325 is displayed as if it were spreading from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area as being spread from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (Fig. 109(E) )reference).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is finished and the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden, the movable body 32 starts moving from the presentation position to the origin position (see FIG. 109(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach effect develops (see FIG. 109(G)).

<Strong development performance B>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect B will be explained based on FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), when strong development effect B is started when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach effect, the layer 4 image higher than the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the drawing area, and a crack is displayed radially extending from the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. (See FIG. 110(B)). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, but when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the crack appearance is noticeable. It will be displayed as follows.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 110(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed (see FIG. 110(D)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 110(D), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 110(E)). Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the decorative pattern in which the developed pattern with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped is displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 110(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 110(G)).

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 110(H)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed, and the developed symbol is hidden (see FIG. 111(I)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect becomes higher (see FIGS. 111(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the weak S reach effect develops into the strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has been broken and changed to the reach title image 006SG326. Therefore, changes in reach performance can be shown without any discomfort.

<Cut-in production>
The details of the operation example of the cut-in effect will be explained based on FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), when the cut-in effect is started when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the strong S reach effect, the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect is The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 112(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed. In addition, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in a state where the button is pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, which is enlarged and displayed as time passes (FIG. 112(C), (See (D)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 112(C)). Note that the operation promotion image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the whiteout image 006SG303, so the first visibility is the same as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed. It is displayed while maintaining the first visibility.

Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible (see FIG. 112(D)), and the operation promotion image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 become hidden. , the character image 006SG307 "Heat!!" becomes visible (see FIG. 112(E)), and the transmittance reaches 100%, so that after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 112(F)). ), the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden (see FIG. 112(G)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance patterns X and Y of the cut-in performance are both described as performance patterns with a cracking performance, but as the performance pattern of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern Y with high expectation of jackpot is used as a performance pattern with a high probability of winning. The performance pattern X with a low jackpot expectation may be used as a chance performance pattern that involves a performance, and the performance pattern that does not involve a cracking performance.In such a case, in the performance pattern that does not involve a cracking performance, a belt-shaped The effect may be performed in such a manner that a cut-in image (not shown) is displayed.

<Result notification performance (jackpot)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification performance (jackpot) will be explained based on FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 113(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot display result, after the object image 006SG308 in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 113(C)), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the predetermined production position. The glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308 in accordance with this falling movement. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread downward from the movable body 32. Further, the object image 006SG308 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while the glass plate image When 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously (see FIG. 113(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started at a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 113(E)), and a return-to-origin operation is performed in which the movable body 32 rises from the predetermined presentation position to the origin position. In response to the start of the whiteout image 006SG303, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 113(F)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 113(F), at the timing when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and the corresponding Instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters is executed. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 113(G)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 113(H)), the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The display of is completed, it is announced that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 114(I)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See FIG. 114(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect is started in response to the start of the upward movement for the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible. By completing the rising motion of the movable body 32 to return from the predetermined performance position to the origin position before the end (becoming non-display), it is possible to quickly notify that a jackpot has been achieved.

<Result notification performance (missing)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be explained based on FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 115(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result is an off display result, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period in the layer 7 image drawing area without moving the movable body 32 (FIG. 115(C) reference). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305.

Thereafter, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from the approximate center position in the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. (See FIG. 115(D)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

In this way, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state was maintained and the cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301 was broken was not performed, so that it was possible that the jackpot game state was not controlled. be notified.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked manner, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again in the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 115(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed. After being displayed (see FIG. 115(F)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 115(G)).

(Details of performance)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 118, FIG. 99, and FIG. is displayed (first stage crack display period). Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of the present embodiment, in the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot see the broken pieces. It is now impossible to visually recognize 006SG302. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, and the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect) (second stage crack display). period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have transparency, and other images ( For example, background images, etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over the above-mentioned crack display period of 500 ms, and the glass plate For 1000 ms from the cracking timing of the image 006SG301A, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, but in the first continuous cracking effect, the types of cracking effect sounds shown in Fig. 99 (E ) is output, and in the second continuous crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character shown in FIG. 100(E) is output together with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect. Furthermore, the crack effect sound has a louder volume than the crack effect sound and is a sound that is easily recognized by the player, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even higher volume than the crack effect sound, Moreover, since the output period is longer than that of the crack effect sound, the sound is more easily recognized by the player than the crack effect sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed. In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 400ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 119, and FIG. 101, as a dialogue preview performance, first, as an operation promotion performance, an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, the first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from the timing (1st stage crack display period). Next, when it comes time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period ). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the speech preview performance of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. It becomes. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, and the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect). Note that the fragmented images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview performance have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragmented images 006SG302. person is visible.

In addition, in the dialogue preview performance, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period). For 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a crack effect sound corresponding to the break effect (break effect sound output period). In addition, the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the dialogue preview performance, the first continuous cracking performance, and the second continuous cracking performance, and the cracking performance sound was output in the dialogue preview performance. Afterwards (when the crack effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of character image 006SG306 is output. This can prevent dialogue voice sounds from becoming difficult to hear due to cracking effect sounds.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed.

As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 120(A), FIG. 120(B), FIG. 102, and FIG. is displayed, and an image in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (first stage operation period). A crack is displayed for 2000 ms from the end timing of the preceding action (action of the character) (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 120(B), the crack display period of 2000 ms is composed of a 1000 ms pre-crack display period and a 1000 ms post-crack display period after the pre-crack display period. . In the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the pre-crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 103) reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible for the player to view.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change effect A in the success pattern, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack pre-display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack. Along with the sound output period), a character voice corresponding to the action of the character is output, and for 2500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Cracked production sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusively for background change effect A, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 2500ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. Furthermore, although the output period of the crack sound is set to 500 ms, it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or the sound may be output in accordance with the progress of the crack over 2000 ms. Furthermore, overlapping with the cracking sound, a motion effect sound is output for a period of 100 ms corresponding to the motion effect display period. The motion effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound, and the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the motion effect sound is output, but since the output period is shorter than the cracking sound, the motion effect sound is It becomes possible to hear the cracking sound after the output.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image light emission data table until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission is white in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). The light emission data for the crack display period mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light for 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display period to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the table, light is emitted in a manner that corresponds to the displayed crack. Furthermore, by using the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) for 1000 ms from the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect. Light emission is mainly performed. In addition, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, the white light emission is mainly performed in the manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Light emission is performed without In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 500ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness. Although an example has been described in which a light emission data table for a normal background image is used in the pre-stage operation period, the present invention is not limited to this. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using the light emission data table. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in FIG. 102(D), but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. By doing this, there will be a sharp difference between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the background change effect A is produced. The effect can be further enhanced. The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 120(C), in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary operation. That is, in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the crack effect is not executed, and therefore the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is continued. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 102(B) and 102(C), although an exciting effect is performed to determine whether or not the character is displayed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. An image emission data table is used.

As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 121(A), and FIG. 104, as the background change effect B of the successful pattern, first, a crack in the first stage is displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5. (1st stage crack display period). In the first-stage crack display period, from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. be done.

Further, from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed in a wider area in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms than in the first stage crack display period. (2nd stage crack display period). In addition, even in the second stage crack display period, from the start timing of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. will be displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the first-stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the second-stage crack display period have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. While each small pod fragment image is designed to have a different size and number, the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are commonly displayed in a downward frame-out. It has become.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 104) reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 750 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change production B in the success pattern, the first stage crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the first stage crack display period in accordance with the display of the crack. (1st stage cracking sound output period), the speakers 8L and 8R output the second cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack for 500ms from the start timing of the second crack display period (2nd stage cracking sound output period). For 150 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (the cracking effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect B is a sound exclusively for background change effect B, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 1250ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 250 ms. In addition, the volume related to cracking in background change effect B is that the cracking effect sound is the loudest, and the volume may be the same for the 1st stage cracking sound and the 2nd stage cracking sound, or the volume of the 2nd stage cracking sound may be the same. may be made louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). .

As shown in FIGS. 121(B) and 121(C), the background change effect B in failure pattern 1 is a crack in the first stage for 1500 ms and a crack in the outer first stage for 200 ms. Although the small fragment image corresponding to the failure pattern 2 is displayed, the second stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken. The first stage crack and a small fragment image are displayed for 200ms, and the second stage crack is displayed for 1500ms from the timing when 1500ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, and the second stage crack is displayed for 200ms. Although a small fragment image corresponding to the crack is displayed, the effect pattern is such that the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In the background change effect B with these failure patterns, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 116, 122, and 105, in the pseudo-continuous presentation, first, in the display area of the image display device 5, a "left" decorative pattern, a "right" decorative pattern, and a "middle" decorative pattern are displayed. Temporarily stop in this order. Then, a crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern which is the "medium" decorative pattern (crack display period). During the crack display period, a falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed for 1500 ms as a preliminary operation (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. It should be noted that the cracks in the crack display period of the pseudo continuous effect and the cracks in the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to occur in different ways. For example, the crack in the background change effect A is displayed in such a manner that the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301 progresses step by step over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. The cracks are displayed in such a manner that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is a period in which the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible.

Incidentally, for 3000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect (break effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the pseudo continuous effect is a sound exclusively for the pseudo continuous effect, and includes the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. This is a composed sound, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is output for 1000 ms out of the 3000 ms output period, as well as the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, and then for 2000 ms. The sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is continuously output. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, that is, the end timing of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background Light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the image (second background image 006SG082), and for 2000 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A, it is used for crack display. By using the light emission data table, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack display. Then, for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. Light emission is mainly performed. After the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, for 2000 ms, by using the light emission data table for pseudo continuous effect corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect has been executed, the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is used. The light is emitted. For example, when executing the first pseudo continuous effect, the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in green according to the execution of the first pseudo continuous effect, and when the second pseudo continuous effect is executed, the second pseudo continuous effect is emitted. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit red light in accordance with the execution of the performance. After the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081 ) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment have different crack display periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the length of the crack display period may be the same in the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 123(A), FIG. 106, and FIG. is an image that acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern in the glass plate image 006SG301. The images that act on the display area 5C are displayed in sequence over 10,000 ms (first-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L ( Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the crack is displayed for 4000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A movement effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. The small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R are different from each other as shown in FIG. Because the values of the parameters of "strength" and "repetition" are different, the speed of scattering and the size and number of each small fragment image are designed to be different, but the value of the parameter of "gravity" is the same. Because of this, they are commonly displayed in a downward frame.

When the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the pre-stage operation period and the pre-stage operation period ends, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed at that timing becomes the normal reach background corresponding to the normal reach effect. The image will be updated. Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the reach suggestion effect of the success pattern of this embodiment, the player is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303 and visually recognizes the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 1500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, from the end of the second half of the white-out display period, the highlighted display of decorative symbols will be increased to 3000 ms to notify the player that the player has reached a reach, for example by temporarily enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols. This is carried out over a period of time (decorative pattern highlighting period).

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern, a left crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack display period). Along with the cracking sound output period), the first character voice corresponding to the first action of the character is output, and the right sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned right crack display period. At the same time as the cracking sound is output (right cracking sound output period), the second character voice corresponding to the second action of the character is output, and for 2000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speaker 8L , 8R, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output (break effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion production (success pattern) is a sound exclusively for the reach suggestion production, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the temporary enlargement of the decorative pattern are used to indicate the reach. This is a sound that includes a sound effect of emphasizing the decorative pattern to notify the player that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 1000ms out of the 3000ms output period. The highlighted sound effect is output together with the cracked sound effect, and then the highlighted sound effect is continuously output for 2000 ms. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image will be output. Furthermore, when the action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is produced in the decorative pattern display area 5L where the action effect is on the "left". It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is controlled by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Alternatively, light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and within 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. By using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms), light emission mainly consisting of white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. After the light emission in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 123(B), in the reach-suggestion performance in the failure pattern, as a preliminary operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed in the decorative pattern display area on the "left". 5L, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C are sequentially displayed for 14000 ms (first stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, a crack is displayed for 12000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A movement effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, so the scattering speed of the small fragment image 006SG302 and the size and number of each small fragment image are different. Since the player cannot determine whether the pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the pattern, it is possible to incite whether or not the normal reach is executed appropriately.

In addition, in the failure pattern reach suggestion performance, a left crack sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack Right crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period (sound output period) in accordance with the display of the crack (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern (timing 10000 has elapsed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms. (whiteout display period). The white-out display period is a period in which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are rendered invisible to the player by displaying the white-out image 006SG303. Furthermore, when the motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the motion effect is output. It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In addition, in the reach suggestion effect of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) using the light emission data table for normal background images or chance background images or the chance background image After light emission is executed in a manner according to the display of the second background image 006SG082, during the whiteout display period, white light is emitted in a manner according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the whiteout light emission data table. Light emission mainly involves light emission. Then, from the end of the white-out display period, the failure notification light emission data table is used to emit white light in a manner corresponding to the notification that there is no reach (that the reach suggestion effect is a failure pattern). The main light emission is performed. Incidentally, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach is not reached (that the reach suggesting performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display is stopped. Note that the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the light emission data table for whiteout, and the light emission data table for failure notification are all light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. , White light emission based on the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white emission and low-intensity white emission, whereas for whiteout White light emission based on the light emission data table and the failure notification light emission data table is executed without including a blinking pattern. Further, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the failure notification light emission data table (until the variable display ends by stopping the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 117, FIG. 124, and FIG. The image acting on the central part is displayed for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Although the pre-operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-operation period (2000 ms) pattern is provided, and when it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pre-operation period (4000 ms) is set as 4000 ms. It may be determined at a high rate to execute the weak development effect using the pattern of the first stage operation period (2000 ms).

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of normal reach that had been displayed up to that point changes to the weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, during 3000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 comes to an end, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that had been displayed up to that point is updated to the super reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α. Ru.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible. Note that the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency during the fragment image display period. Out of a certain 3500 ms, the display is displayed in a transparent mode for 1500 ms after the display starts (e.g., transmittance of 70% or more), and then gradually becomes non-transparent for 1000 ms. (eg, transmittance of 70% to 10%), and then displays in a non-transparent mode (eg, transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (break effect sound output period). In addition to the crack effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the crack timing. It should be noted that the crack effect sound has a higher volume than the weak development effect sound, so it is a sound that is easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the pre-stage operation, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. By using the light emission data table for weak development effects over the 4000ms from the start timing of the pre-stage operation to the breakage timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, light emission that is not mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the weak development effect is performed. is performed, and for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter half period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), it is displayed in a manner according to the cracking effect. The light emission is mainly white light emission, and for 2500 ms from the end of the whiteout display latter period to the end of the fragment image display period, the weak development effect is produced by using the light emitting table for weak development effect again. Light emission is performed in a manner depending on the situation. In addition, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs.

In addition, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5, the weak development effect background image is updated to the super reach The update to the reach α background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image in this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in accordance with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the whiteout light emission data table. Note that the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed at a timing before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500 ms before the end), and in this case, the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed before the fragment image display period is displayed frame-out. The display of whiteout image 006SG303 will start at .

As shown in FIG. 117, FIG. 125, and FIG. 109, in the strong development performance A, first, as a pre-stage operation, a falling motion of the movable body 32 is performed for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1000 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α that had been displayed up to that point changes to the strong development effect A. The fragment image 006SG302 is updated to the strong development effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to , and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 described above from the player is displayed for 1500 ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display first half period is displayed. Whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. It is possible. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect A background image corresponding to the strong development effect A that had been displayed at that timing changes to the super reach β background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β. Updated. The movable body 32 that fell as a preliminary operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period. (moveable body rising period). Furthermore, from the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the start timing of the movable body rise period), the sound corresponding to the strong development effect A (strong development effect A effect sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. be exposed. Note that in the strong development effect A, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect unique to the strong development effect A. In addition, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output in the strong development effect A, and in this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect A effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a corresponding manner, and by using the light emission data table for strong development effect A for 2500 ms from the start timing of the fall of the movable body 32 to the end timing of the fragment image display period, Light emission that is not primarily white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong development effect A. From the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the end timing of the fragment image display period), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be displayed by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs in a corresponding manner.

In addition, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, an example is given in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the initial period of whiteout display for 1500 ms from the falling timing of the movable body 32, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the whiteout display early period of the strong development effect A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

As shown in FIG. 117, FIG. 126, FIG. 110, and FIG. is displayed (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the strong development effect B and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion effect, etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. Each one is designed to be different in size and number.

When 1500 ms passes and the crack display period ends, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. When the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α that had been displayed up to that point now corresponds to the strong development effect B. Updated to strong development performance B. Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, a normal rotation speed, and a normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development effect B that had been displayed up to that time corresponds to the reach effect of super reach β. It is updated to the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). In addition, in strong development effect B, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the above crack display period (crack sound output period) according to the display of the crack, From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken to the end timing of the fragment image display period, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the strong development effect B (strong development effect B effect sound) for 3000 ms. Note that in the strong development effect B, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect that is unique to the strong development effect B. Furthermore, in strong development effect B, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output. In this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect B effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

Furthermore, with regard to the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088). By using the light emission data table for strong development effect B, the light emission data table for strong development effect B is used for 1500 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to B, and light emission for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is performed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter period of whiteout display. By using the data table, the light emission is mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, and the strong light emission is performed for 2000ms from the end timing of the late whiteout display period to the end timing of the fragment image display period. By using the light emission data table for advanced effect B, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong advanced effect B. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B, by using the light emission data table for the super reach B background image, the manner corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs.

In the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image, the strong development effect B is displayed by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5. The update from the background image to the super reach β background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image in this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using a whiteout light emission data table. In this case, the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for whiteout are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. White light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the white-out light emission data table Light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern. Further, although the crack display period of strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the crack timing. For example, cracks may be displayed so that they gradually expand at first, second, and third timings between the start timing of super reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in FIGS. 117, 127, and 112, as a cut-in performance, first, as an operation promotion performance, an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). In particular, the operation promotion image during the execution period of the operation promotion effect of this embodiment is displayed as a pre-operation mode image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation mode image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, this timing is displayed as the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. The broken glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a suggestion image according to the production pattern is displayed until the end of the cut-in production (over 5000ms from the cracking timing), and the above-mentioned fragments are displayed for 500ms. After the white-out image 006SG303 for hiding the image 006SG302 from the player is displayed (white-out display early period), the white-out image 006SG303, which has a higher transmittance than the white-out display early period, is displayed for 500 ms. (later period of whiteout display). For this reason, in the cut-in effect of this embodiment, during the initial white-out display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the white-out image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestion image. has become impossible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 and the suggestion image are visible to the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragment images 006SG302. person is visible. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, a normal rotation speed, and a normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Further, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, a post-operation mode image is displayed for 1000 ms, which is the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation mode image display period). Since the after-operation mode image is an image that is displayed with priority over the white-out image 006SG303, the player can visually recognize the operation mode image for 1000 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. .

In addition, in the cut-in effect, a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cut-in effect sound output period). . Note that in the cut-in performance, unlike the weak development performance, etc., the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the cut-in performance. Furthermore, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output in the cut-in effect.In this case, by setting the priority of the cut-in effect sound high, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output. The output may be limited.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 will be controlled according to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). The light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is displayed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter half of the whiteout display period. By using the light emission data table for cut-in effect, light emission mainly consisting of white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, and from the end timing of the late white-out display period to the end timing of the suggested image display period. By using this, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. In addition, after the light emission is finished in the mode corresponding to the cut-in effect, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image again, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs.

As shown in FIG. 117, FIG. 128(A), FIG. 113, and FIG. fall period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms have passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). In this crack display period, the motion effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the crack display period, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The small fragment image 006SG302A, which is also small in size, is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. It is designed to vary in speed, size, and number of small fragment images. In addition, since the values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters are different between the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (failure pattern), the scattering speed and small fragments are different. Each image is designed to have a different size and number.

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α that has been displayed up to that time or the super reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach effect) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach effect is updated to the jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) that indicates that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragments remain for 1500ms. Image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period). Although not particularly shown in FIG. 128(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and after 10,000 ms (the variable display stop timing of the variable display) The background image (first background image 006SG081) is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and then updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game state from the variable display stop timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the success pattern result notification performance of the present embodiment, in the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 1000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

Note that the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body rising period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. sound output period). Note that in the result notification performance (success pattern), unlike the weak development performance and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that it is possible to suitably notify that the jackpot has been determined. In addition, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output in the result notification effect (success pattern). In this case, by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image ( Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the weak S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and whiteout occurs from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) for 1000 ms up to the end timing of the late display period, light emission, mainly white light, is performed in a manner corresponding to the break effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, by using the light emission data table for the jackpot notification background image, the light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the jackpot notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the jackpot game light emission data table, light emission mainly including rainbow color light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the jackpot game background image.

As shown in FIG. 128(B), in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, the fall of the movable body 32 and the cracks accompanying the fall of the movable body 32 are not displayed, and the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301A for the success pattern are not displayed. From this timing, a crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms (crack display period). In addition, from the start timing of the crack display period, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) or the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, becomes variable. This is an image indicating that the display result is a failure, and is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image. The display of the deviation notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, and is updated to a color eye-catching image at the end of the crack display period. The display period of the eye-catch image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catch image ends, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) in color like the eye-catch image is displayed. is started. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying the monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (the first background image 006SG081) is now displayed.

In addition, in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned crack display period (crack effect sound output period).

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image (weak Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the variable display stops from the start timing of the crack display period. At the timing, by using the light emission data table for the failure notification background image, light emission is mainly made of white light emission in a manner corresponding to the display of the failure notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the normal background image light emission data table, light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). . Note that the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the deviation notification background image are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for white out (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high brightness white light emission and low brightness white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for white out White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the broken image 006SG302). The whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying at a timing earlier than the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Fragment speed when performing cracking effect)
Next, the above-mentioned first continuous cracking effect, second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect. The display speed of the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the broken effect is executed as effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 129(A), among these performances, the first consecutive breaking performance, the second consecutive breaking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, and the weak development. The broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when performing the cracking effect as the effect, the strong development effect A, or the result notification effect, is displayed throughout the broken image display period including the early white-out display period and the late white-out display period. It is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129(B), the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the cracking effect as the cut-in effect are executed, is different from the white-out display early period and the white-out display period. While it is displayed moving at a speed of V1 for 1000ms with the latter period, during the fragment image display period after the whiteout display latter period (2000ms for strong development effect B, 1500ms for cut-in effect). , and is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) that is lower than the speed V1. Note that as effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the speed V0, FIG. 129 shows strong development effect B and cut-in effect, but background change effect B and strong development effect A are also as described below. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at a speed of V0, and when indicating to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect B and strong development effect A is displayed moving at a speed of V1. It is also decided to move and display at a speed V0 at a high rate.

(Details of cracking effect)
Next, details of the crack effect will be explained based on FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in the crack effect. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a display example of each crack pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the cracking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, something appears from the rear at the approximately center position of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A crack in which a crack starts under the setting where an impact (force) is applied, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed. The image is now displayed as an animation. In other words, the cracking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to the broken image 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a broken state (fragmented state). In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A is started to crack when a sphere collides with it from the rear at a substantially central position.

Note that the animation display in which the glass plate breaks and the fragment images scatter is actually composed of a number of still images (for example, about 30 to 100 frames) depending on the fragment image display period, but in Fig. 131, the broken image is Five still images are extracted from among the plurality of still images that make up the animation display of broken fragment images from the start to the end, and are arranged in chronological order. Furthermore, in FIG. 131, the five-frame images of each crack pattern are not five consecutive frames, but actually a plurality of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, there are various ways of cracking, and multiple types of cracking patterns (for example, cracking patterns A to G) are set in advance, and the performance control CPU 120 can break depending on the type of performance to be executed. It is possible to perform a cracking effect based on a preset cracking pattern.

Specifically, cracking pattern A is a pattern corresponding to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, cracking pattern B is a pattern corresponding to background change effect B and strong development effect B, and cracking pattern C is a pattern corresponding to background change effect B and strong development effect B. , is a pattern corresponding to a pseudo continuous performance and a result notification performance (jackpot), a crack pattern D is a pattern corresponding to a first continuous crack performance, a second continuous crack performance, and a dialogue preview performance, and a crack pattern E is, The cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a weak development effect, the cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a strong development effect A, and the cracking pattern G is a pattern corresponding to a cut-in effect.

Each of the crack patterns A to G is different in at least one of the following items: "acting entity," "crack mode," "crack range," and "fragment image display mode." Note that the display period, display timing, etc. are as described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117, so their description will be omitted below.

"Agent" indicates the actor who acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A. For crack patterns A and E, the crack effect is executed according to the action of the "character", and for crack patterns C and F, the action of the "movable body" is performed. A cracking effect is executed according to the splitting pattern B and D, and the breaking effect is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the actor. "Crack mode" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack mode before it breaks, and for crack patterns A to D, the crack effect is executed after the "crack mode" is displayed, and the crack pattern In E to G, the crack effect is executed without the "crack mode" being displayed. Note that the "crack mode" includes a plurality of types of modes in which the display position on the display screen, the number of displays, the shape of the crack, etc. are different. The "crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and the crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "whole" display screen, and the crack pattern D is "part". "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent mode, and a part of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are set as "non-transparent", and other crack patterns are set as "transparent". .

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the near side of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, since the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 has a shape that reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area. , when the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is large (45 degrees to 90 degrees), the light is easily transmitted without being reflected, making it easier to see the lower layer image drawing area, while the second (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), the light is reflected and difficult to pass through, making it difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area (Figure 140 reference). For example, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then When a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, vertical and horizontal positions, depth position, etc. of this light can be changed in various settings, and the setting values regarding the light may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

Furthermore, the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken include a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 having different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, and the like. Further, each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions, at various speeds, and in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts until it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, those that are displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction). There are some that are displayed in a manner that they move towards the target, and others that have different moving speeds, rotational speeds, number of rotations, display periods, etc. Regarding the direction of movement, it is possible to move not only in one direction among the X, Y, and Z axes, but also in multiple axes among the X, Y, and Z axes (for example, the XY-axis direction and the XY-axis direction). Including those moving towards the target.

In other words, each of the crack patterns A to G includes at least one of the plurality of pieces when the fragment image 006SG302 is scattered, in addition to the above-mentioned "acting entity", "crack mode", "crack range", and "fragment image display mode". The display mode such as the shape, size, rotation speed, rotation speed, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period of the fragment image 006SG302. At least one of them is a different pattern.

In addition, the cracking patterns A to G are cracking animations created using, for example, the shutter function of a predetermined animation creation software, and the created cracking patterns A to G are based on multiple parameters shown below. The numerical values of at least some of the parameters are different.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in FIG. 130, "Gravity" allows setting of the gravity, and adjusts the acceleration at which the scattered debris gradually falls. Because of gravity, it is not constant but gradually accelerates downward. The "gravity direction" can set the direction in which gravity is applied, and can specify up, down, left, and right directions based on 0 degrees (upward direction). The "gravity gradient" allows gravity to be adjusted closer in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with the "direction of gravity." It is possible to specify all directions in 3D space: front and back, top, bottom, left and right. Note that for values of "-90" and "90", since the direction is the Z-axis direction, the "direction of gravity" is essentially treated as invalid. "Strength" allows you to adjust the force of the flying debris; increasing the value will increase the speed at which the debris will fly. "Amount of variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move large and heavy objects. Therefore, if the same impact is applied, small objects will move or rotate faster, and larger, heavier objects will move slower. The difference in physical animation depending on the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0% to 100%; at 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small and large fragments will move in the same way. Note that the default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repeat" allows you to adjust the size of the broken pieces; increasing the value will make each piece smaller and increase the number of pieces. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of fragments, and increasing the value will increase the time it takes for movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. In addition, as if it were attached to a sticky object, resistance is applied to gravity, so the falling speed becomes slower. In other words, when the value of "viscosity" is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the pieces becomes slow motion. In addition, as crack patterns in which the value of "viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than usual, FIG. 130 shows crack pattern B, crack pattern E, and crack pattern F, but as will be described later, crack pattern The value of "Viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than normal.

The above parameters are just examples, and in addition to the above, there are also "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and "position", which allows the position of the force to be adjusted in the X-axis and Y-axis directions. ", "Depth" which allows you to adjust the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "Rotation speed" which allows you to set the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302. It may also be possible to set a "random degree" or the like that can be set.

Next, the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering mode) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern will be briefly described.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "gravity direction" is set to "180°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to the surrounding area, it naturally moves downward. On the other hand, for crack patterns B and G, the value of "Gravity direction" is set to "0°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to spread to the surroundings, Compared to crack patterns A, C to F, it is less likely to fall downward.

In this way, crack patterns A, C to F (first pattern) and crack patterns B and G (second pattern) have different "gravitational direction" settings, so crack patterns A, C to F are " 180°'', which means that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves and is displayed is different. This allows you to create a variety of patterns, increasing your interest.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "variation amount" is set to "30%", so the fragment image 006SG302 is a small fragment image 006SG302 that moves and rotates quickly, and the large heavy fragment image 006SG302 is is a slow mode, while for crack patterns B and G, the value of “variation amount” is set to “0%”, so in the fragment image 006SG302, small and large pieces are in the same mode with no difference. Therefore, it is considered a cracking pattern with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G can be used when you want to show a scene.Crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way and fall in the same way regardless of the size, so it is a crack pattern that is suitable depending on the scene. can be selected.

In addition, crack patterns A and C (first pattern) and crack patterns D to F (second pattern) have the same "gravity direction" setting but different "gravity value" settings, so the fragment image The speed at which 006SG302 falls is different. In this way, by varying the numerical value of the parameter "gravity value" and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved. More specifically, since the crack patterns D to F have larger numerical values, the fragment images 006SG302 fall faster.

In addition, for the crack patterns A to C, E, and G, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while While the crack patterns D and F are displayed as if they are moving in the axial direction, that is, toward the front, the fragment images are 006SG302 is a mode in which it is displayed only by moving in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in the crack patterns A to C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves toward the front side, the fragment image is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, so that It can emphasize that you are approaching. In particular, for crack patterns B and G, the numerical value of the "gravity gradient" is set to "90", so the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves further toward the front.

Furthermore, for crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and " The second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

In addition, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) are, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern). The first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F. (2nd pattern) and cracking pattern G (3rd pattern) are different in that the first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for cracking pattern E and "2" for cracking pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "2". "5" is common. In this way, each pattern has a common part with respect to the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of cracking patterns A to G having different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and a cracking effect is executed based on the cracking patterns A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the type of performance to be executed by the performance control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the determined performance may be It is possible to determine the numerical values of various parameters according to the type of item, jackpot expectation level, etc., create breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values, and display an animation display of the glass plate breaking based on the created breaking animation data. You can also use it as

(Display example of crack pattern)
Next, details of display examples of crack patterns A to G will be explained based on FIGS. 75 to 138. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of FIGS. 75 to 138, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303. This is an example of a display of a crack pattern in a mode in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed although it is a corresponding image. In other words, this is a diagram comparing a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 0%, and the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3). In (A4), the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 100%.

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of FIGS. 75 to 138, in the animation display in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, in the frame at the beginning of the crack (for example, (B1)), the frame is located at approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Since the setting is such that the cracking starts when an impact (force) such as a sphere colliding from the rear side is applied, the scattering starts from the fragment image 006SG302 near the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the surrounding area A large number of fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started scattering. In other words, at the stage when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed over the entire display screen instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the timing of the cracking, began to change to a broken state, a large number of glass plate images 006SG301A, which were hidden from view at the time of the cracking, filled almost the entire area of the display screen. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the images displayed in the lower display layer image drawing area than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 are almost difficult to see.

Therefore, at the start timing of the cracking effect, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed for several frames and filling almost the entire area of the display screen, changes to a broken state, and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are created. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is better if the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner, as in the cracking patterns A to D. However, as in the cracking patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A If the crack effect suddenly starts without being displayed in the crack mode, the image will suddenly be displayed filling the display screen, as if to drown out the image that was displayed before the crack effect started. Since the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a broken state and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, there is a possibility that this may give an unnatural impression to the player.

Therefore, at the beginning of cracking, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 to hide a large number of fragment images 006SG302, as shown in the whiteout display early period of (A1). This can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in the latter period of whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), the whiteout image 006SG303 is not suddenly hidden, but is faded out and the transmittance is gradually increased, thereby reducing debris. Since the image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has been moved from the center of the display screen to the surrounding area to some extent, the manner in which the fragmented image 006SG302 breaks and scatters can be made to look natural and natural.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 75 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 75 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 75 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 133, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 133 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 133 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 133 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 134, in the crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 134 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 spread radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 134 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 134 (B3) to (B5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a pseudo continuous effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, and a cut-in effect are executed, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as a background image. The present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly illustrated, for example, background images may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type of presentation.

As shown in FIG. 135, in the crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 135 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, to the right) or the Y-axis direction (for example, to the left) (see Figure 135 (B2)), it falls downward and is displayed as frame-out mainly from the bottom side (Figure 135 (B2)). 135 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 136, in the crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 136 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 136 (B2)), it moves in slow motion. 136 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to FIGS. 136 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to No. 136 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Furthermore, in FIG. 136 (B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally not shown in order to make it easier to see the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, the fragment image 006SG302 in the crack pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from FIG. 136 (B3), and it takes time to display it out of frame. A super reach α effect may be performed by white-out while moving in slow motion so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 137 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, to the right) and the Y-axis direction (for example, to the left) so as to spread radially (see Figure 137 (B2)), the main body falls downward in slow motion. 137 (B3) to (B5)). Further, since the small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, it falls first and is displayed out of frame, whereas the large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 is slow, so it is displayed out of frame after the small fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern at the top right of the display screen in the reach mode will be temporarily hidden, and will be displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in the breaking effect is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to omit as much display as possible that is not related to the cracking effect, and to enhance the effect of the cracking effect. In addition, when a cracking effect occurs not only during the strong S reach effect but also during other reach effects such as the weak S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern of the reach mode is temporarily hidden, and the fragment image in the corresponding cracking effect is temporarily hidden. 006SG302 may be displayed again when it becomes hidden.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 138 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 138 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 138 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which corresponds to FIGS. 138 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 138 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of fragment image)
Next, details of the fragment image will be explained based on FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in (A) a pseudo continuous effect and (B) in a cut-in effect. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in (A) background change effect A and (B) in strong development effect B. Note that the fragment image indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 140 indicates that it is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect is in a non-transparent mode (for example, the transmittance 0%), on the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect recognizes at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 and character image 006SG307 that are in a superimposed relationship. Since the image is in a transparent mode (for example, 100% transmittance) that allows the fragmentation image to be displayed, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized. (the background is transparent), and the second fragment image 006SG302 is an image in a transparent mode (the characters are transparent) that allows at least part of the character image 006SG307 (special image) to be recognized. The image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and text are transparent) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the character image 006SG307. By varying the display mode of the images, the presentation effect of each presentation can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(A), all the fragment images 006SG302 among the fragment images in the background change effect A are moved downward to the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5 and framed. While the first fragment image 006SG302 out of the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is hidden in an out-display mode, as shown in FIG. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is hidden in a frame-out manner by moving vertically and horizontally, and which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5. By being hidden from the front, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 140(A), the fragment image 006SG302 has a first angle (for example, an angle where the plane faces the front side) depending on the rotation operation, and the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees. When the angle of the fragment image 006SG302 is a large angle), it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and the rotation operation causes the fragment image 006SG302 to move to a second angle smaller than the first angle. (for example, a small angle at which the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end face faces the front side), at least one of the background images in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302. It becomes difficult to recognize the parts. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 140(A), when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image is at the second angle, so that the fragment image The presentation effect when displaying 006SG302 can be enhanced.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, the player It is possible to control the jackpot game state which is advantageous for players. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, a first continuous breaking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, and a dialogue notice that indicate that the jackpot game state will be controlled during variable display. Control means for executing performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, result notification performance, etc. It is equipped with a certain performance control CPU 120. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to draw images with different display priorities in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5. It has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas.

For example, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative designs as layer 2 images, and objects such as characters as layer 3 images. A layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging crack precursor images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as a layer 4 image, a glass plate image as a layer 5 image. Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and placing 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 (glass shards, etc.), Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and placing operation effect images as layer 6 images, White as layer 7 images Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the out image 006SG303, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the operation promotion image as the layer 8 image, variable display compatible display (pending display, etc.) as the layer 9 image. Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the active display), drawing and arranging the small pattern (4th pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the right-hand hitting notification image as the layer 10 image. It has layer 10 image drawing area for. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

Note that unless a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, and the layer 9 image drawing area is the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is a layer 9 image. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority on the display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. Yes, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. This is an image with a low priority, and the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background image (second background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Background image 006SG082, 7th background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084) can be drawn, and layer 1- A background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (5th background image 006SG085) can be drawn in the 3rd image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area is layer 2. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is not drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This is an image with a low display priority in No. 5.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different timings. Further, as shown in FIG. 120, the background change effect A includes a crack display period in which a crack is displayed when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the image 006SG301 is broken and a fragment image display period is displayed, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.As shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a fragmented image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than the background change effect due to the operation.

Furthermore, the background change effect A is displayed on the image display device 5 before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started. The strong development performance A is a performance that changes the background image of the image display device 5 before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A starts. This is an effect that changes the background images displayed in . In other words, in this embodiment, background change effect A is used to display the crack and fragment image 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and background change effect A is used to display the fragment image 006SG302 without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. By being able to execute the development effect A at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is common to the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. Since the types of background images displayed before and after the display are different, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. be able to.

[Form 1-2]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is better when strong development effect A is executed without background change effect A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when performance A is executed and strong development performance A is executed (for example, see FIGS. 90 to 93). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and increase interest.

[Form 1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, It is also possible to provide a case where the game goes through different chance background stimulation effects (FIG. 87). Also, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A, it is better to change the background image via background change effect A to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed by either the background change effect A or the chance background stimulation effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the strong development effect is better when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A is executed. Before the execution of A, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background change effect A is not executed (for example, see FIGS. 90 to 93). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making the user expect that both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A will be executed during the first variable display.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in FIGS. 120 and 125, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect that is executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and strong development effect A is an effect that is executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. It is. In addition, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) and a chance background image (first 2 background image 006SG082), a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a background image indicating that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) shown in FIG. Fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). ), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A has transparency, the chance background that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen through the fragment image 006SG302. It is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the image (second background image 006SG082), and since the background image displayed in strong development effect A does not have transparency, the fragment image 006SG302 Since it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302 in these background change effects A. It is possible to enhance the display and the effect of the strong development effect A.

[Form 1-4-4]
Further, as shown in FIG. 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches the first angle due to the rotation operation, the player can see at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. However, when the fragment image 006SG302 is at the second angle due to the rotation operation, it is difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. good. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plural fragment images 006SG302 becomes the first angle, one of the plural fragment images 006SG302 The second fragment image 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in multiple directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction is The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the axial direction. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-6]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A both have speed changes from the start of display to the timing of the end of display. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving without accompanying movement, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally without any discomfort in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen (see FIGS. 75 and 137). By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A increases, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it disappears on the display screen (Fig. 75, 137). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden, so that the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is more hidden on the display screen than the debris image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed. The number of rotation operations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed until it becomes hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 The number of rotation operations until the display area becomes non-display may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 125, in both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of white-out image 006SG303 in these background change effects A and strong development effect A is the first half of the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303, and the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303. Since it consists of a white-out display latter period during which the person can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that they can be displayed at various times. In addition to being able to surprise the player, the whiteout image 006SG303 can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change effect A and strong development effect can be suitably executed. .

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 125, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the strong development effect The display period of whiteout image 006SG303 in A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms, so by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, background change effect A and strong development effect A are As the relevance increases, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, so it is possible to enhance the effect of both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. can.

[Form 2-3]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A shown in FIG. ) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. By doing so, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started with the whiteout image 006SG303 without any discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 109, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is an image that is displayed in the same manner, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner is increased, and both The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 127, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed moving at a speed of V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragmented image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect moves depending on the progress of the effect. Since the speed changes from the speed V1 to the lower speed V0, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a suitably different impression can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be increased. .

[Form 3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, if the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times in variable display 1, but the cut-in effect can be executed only once, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times. When the cut-in effect is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once, and when the cut-in effect is executed once, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the game is executed twice. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, and increase interest.

[Form 3-3]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the cracked state (glass plate image 006SG301A) in the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect. The whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the two timings, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (FIG. 105(C), FIG. 112 (C)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be made different between the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed moving at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the whiteout Since the image 006SG303 is moved and displayed at a speed V0 which is lower than the speed V1 from the timing when the display period of the image 006SG303 ends, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127, when displaying the white-out image 006SG303 when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in effect, as shown in FIG. 129, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 is may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V1, but not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V0. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in performance from deteriorating.

[Form 3-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the first fragment among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect The number of rotation operations performed from when the image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is longer than the number of times the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of times the rotation operation is performed from the time the image is displayed until the image becomes non-display in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 127, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so the It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, the player can see the fragment images 006SG302 displayed on the image display device 5. While the background image is not visible, the fragmented images 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragmented images 006SG302. is visible, so even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way in the pseudo continuous performance and the cut-in performance, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. Can be done.

[Form 4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is a character image. It is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the image 006SG307 can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a combination of at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and a character image. This is a transparent image in which at least a portion of 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 139). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance in this way, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the rotation movement causes the first fragment image 006SG302 to rotate at the first angle. If this happens, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and if the first fragment image 006SG302 becomes at the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may become difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is rotated at the first angle in the cut-in effect. Sometimes, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 127, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo continuous effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effects include at least one of the glass plate images 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo continuous effects. The display starts displaying a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a period shorter than the crack display period until the fragment image 006SG302 that partially imitates is displayed, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are created. The fragment image 006SG302 is commonly displayed in a manner of moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 141), and is displayed in a manner of moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302 may take a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden on the display screen (Fig. 134, 138). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden, so that the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 5-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect are hidden from view on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 140(A)), and the fragment images in the cut-in effect are hidden. The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It is preferable to hide the display before moving towards the target (for example, see FIG. 140(B)). By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance of this embodiment are performances with different execution timings in the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these reach-suggesting performances and weak-development performances, the right crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is longer than the preceding movement period in the weak-development performance, and the fragment image display period in the reach-suggesting performance and the fragment in the weak-development performance are longer. The length may be different from the image display period (see FIGS. 123 and 124). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
Furthermore, in the reach suggestion performance, the right crack display period may be made longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 123). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach-suggesting performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form 6-3]
In addition, as the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment, there is a case in which the success pattern is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, and a case in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after the crack is displayed. There are cases where the glass plate image 006SG301A is executed in a failure pattern that does not break, and when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the failure pattern, there is a broken image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the success pattern. For a period of 6000 ms, which is longer than 2000 ms of the display period (fragment image display period), cracks appear in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period. Since this is displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate to the player that the reach suggestion performance will not be executed in a successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion performance is a performance that informs that it will become a reach if executed in a successful pattern, it will not become a reach if it is executed in a failure pattern. Since this is a performance that suggests that the rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low, the player is dependent on whether or not the reach-suggesting performance is executed and whether the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. It can attract attention and increase interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be performed during the variable display of 1, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is different from the weak development effect. When the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is made executable after the start and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is started before the execution of the weak development performance, the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not performed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect and increase interest.

[Form 6-5]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the reach suggestion performance, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development performance, In common, a whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (FIG. 106(G), FIG. 108 (D)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-6]
It is possible to highlight the decorative pattern in the reach state in the reach suggestion effect, and in the fragment image display period, the period in which the reach state glue pattern is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so (see FIGS. 107(I) to 107(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that a ready-to-reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 in the reach suggestion effect, the movement effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302, and the timing to start displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 (see FIG. 106(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without causing any discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion performance, the timing at which a crack is displayed in the “left” decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301 and By displaying the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the small fragment image 006SG302A for a longer period of time than the motion effect image 006SG323, the player is informed that a crack has been displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This can be suitably shown.

[Form 6-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started; When acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the motion effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. For this reason, depending on the action of the character, cracks may be displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character appears in the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to prevent the reach-suggestion performance from becoming a monotonous performance by making a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggesting performance when acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form 6-7-4]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion effect, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period in which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period). is also a long period of time, so when a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the character is It is possible to prevent the reach-suggestion performance from becoming a monotonous performance by giving a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggesting performance when acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effect have transparency, the player can visually recognize the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect do not have transparency, the player cannot see at least part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. , the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the speed of both the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect changes from the display start timing to the display end timing. Since the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving without any movement, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
Further, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be set to be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124). By doing this, it is possible to create a difference between the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance, and increase interest through a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 127, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127, when a cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the player presses the push button. 31B is operated or when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking is reached, the cut-in effect is executed, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, it is given priority over the white-out image 006SG303. An image of the state after the push button 31B is operated is displayed. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is 2500 ms, the display period of the state image before the operation of the push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the state image after the operation of the push button 31B is the display period of the white-out image 006SG303. The display period is 1000ms, which is the same as the display period, that is, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect (cut-in image display period) is the same as the display period of the pre-operation mode image of the push button 31B (pre-operation mode image display period). ) and longer than the display period of the state image after operation of the push button 31B (post-operation state image display period), the cut-in effect becomes monotonous and the interest of the cut-in effect decreases. This can be prevented.

[Form 8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous effect, the combination of decorative patterns displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the combination of decorative patterns is different). However, after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo continuous effect). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 8-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect, may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, the period in which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period in which cracks are displayed in pseudo continuous effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, which is different in length. . In both the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started at the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, and these whiteout images are The display period of the image 006SG303 consists of an early white-out display period in which the player cannot see the broken image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303, and a late white-out display period in which the player can see the broken image 006SG302. Therefore, the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be reduced by the whiteout image 006SG303, and the background change effect A and the pseudo-sequence can be suitably executed.

[Form 9-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the same, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect. , may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B is displayed in white from the start of display. Until the out image 006SG303 is displayed, it is displayed moving at a speed of V1, and at the transition, it is displayed moving at a speed of V0, which is lower than the speed V1. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
A first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change effect A, and a second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect B. In common, a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 102 (G), Fig. 110 (H)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V0 in strong development effect B is longer than the period in which it is displayed moving at speed V1. The presentation of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different from the presentation B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V1 in the strong development effect B is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V0. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is moved and displayed, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the strong development presentation B from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A are hidden on the display screen in a manner that they move toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 140(A)), and the fragment images in the strong development effect B The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It becomes hidden before moving toward the object (see FIG. 140(B)). By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are both transparent images, so when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen. It is preferable that there be. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed while moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is different depending on when the display is started and before it is hidden on the display screen (Fig. 75, see Figure 133). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it is hidden, thereby increasing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, multiple pieces displayed in the background change effect A are rotated. The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is greater than the number of times the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed until it becomes non-displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, the rotation movement causes the fragment image 006SG302 to become the first When the angle becomes the second angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 becomes the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 146, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, the first fragment image 006SG302 is When the angle is , the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. By doing this, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, if both background change effect A and strong development effect B can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect can be performed at the timing before reach, and strong development effect. Output B can be executed at the timing after reach, and when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect B is executed, the rate of control to jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the background change effect A is being executed and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
In addition, regarding the background change effect A and strong development effect B shown in FIGS. 120 and 126, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the background change effect A, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous performance. and may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect does not have transparency, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A has transparency. Even if the effect is displayed, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 126, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the lengths of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B are made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are made common. , the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in a plurality of directions, at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction is the fragment image that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302, which takes a longer time to disappear in the display area of the image display device 5 than 006SG302, and is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in the strong development effect B, The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed. By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 123, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so the player may can give you a surprise. Furthermore, while the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion production, the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change production A, and the display period of fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) in the reach suggestion production is 1500ms. On the other hand, since the display period (fragment image display period) of fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is 20,000 ms, a suitably different impression is given even if the effect similarly displays fragment image 006SG302. , can increase interest in games.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack mode according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed from the third crack front mode to the third crack mode. By being able to change the display (see FIGS. 106 and 102), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked manner.

[Form 14-1]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of this embodiment shown in FIG. 118 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, surprises can be given to the player at various timings during the variable display. can give. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect can be executed at a timing after the first continuous cracking effect, and the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have the same length of crack display period, and the fragment image The length of the display period is also the same, and when the second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous cracking effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect is temporarily hidden. Since the crack display period of the second crack effect is started, the effect of the effect is prevented from decreasing due to a new crack being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 has already been displayed. I can do it.

[Form 14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect have at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. The fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including the above, and the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-3]
The character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed in common with the fragment image 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, and the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous breaking effect can be displayed in the first mode (for example, , character image of Jam), and the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect is displayed in a second mode (for example, the character image of Mumu) different from the first mode (Fig. 99 ( F), see FIG. 100(F)), the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be presented differently to increase interest.

[Form 14-4]
Further, while the length of the fragment image display period is different between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect shown in FIG. 118, the character image 006SG305 displayed as a result of the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect The length of the display period may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-5]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, a pattern in which a second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, There is a pattern in which the cracking effect is not executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is better than a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the second consecutive winning performance is executed and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are both displayed moving without changing the speed from the display start timing to the display end timing. It is possible to enhance the relationship between the first consecutive cracking performance and the second consecutive cracking performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. 118, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302, and is displayed in the first continuous cracking effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect can be increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. The relationship between the cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as a result notification performance when the jackpot game state is not controlled, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragmented image 006SG302 to disappear in the background change effect A, and the time required for the cracked image of the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled. Since the required time is different, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form 15-2]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 120, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the background change effect A requires 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled, the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Since it takes 5,500 ms for the image containing the icon to disappear, the player can be appropriately informed that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form 15-3]
There is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification effect (miss). There is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302), and the display size of the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) is larger than that of the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302). This is preferable (see, for example, FIGS. 103(J) and 115(D)). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 different in how they are displayed, and to increase interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background image in the superimposed relationship to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) is in the superimposed relationship. By using a transparent image in which at least a portion of a certain background image can be recognized (see FIG. 130), it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different in how it is presented and to increase its interest.

[Form 15-5]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) are common to a plurality of images including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). It is preferable that the screen is displayed in a manner of moving in the direction (see, for example, FIGS. 75 and 134). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 relevant and to make them more interesting.

[Form 15-6]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the background change effect A, and the broken image 006SG302 in the result notification effect (disappearance). The white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the second timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. . Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIG. 102(G) , see FIG. 115(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (missing), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, The game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a corresponding manner. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, while the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the failure pattern result notification effect. The light emission 9 may continue until a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as stopping the variable display after the failure pattern result notification effect ends, or starting the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the control will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled by the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the second cracked mode, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked mode. The type of background image is different between before and when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect (see Figures 102(A) to 102(F), Figures 103(I), and Figure 103(K)). , Display of the background image before it is announced whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled by the result notification effect, and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is announced that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled. The aspects are different (see FIGS. 115(A) to 115(B) and FIG. 115(D)).

By doing this, it is possible to execute the background change effect A in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, thereby giving a surprise to the player. By changing the display mode of the background image before notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled, the player can be appropriately informed that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled.

[Form 18-1]
Background change effect A includes a first predetermined part that displays the character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked manner according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the glass plate image. This is a performance that includes a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the pseudo-continuous performance includes a third predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 with a second crack. a fourth predetermined part that is displayed in the same manner, a fifth predetermined part that starts the falling motion of the movable body 32, and a fragment image imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a production that includes a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of 006SG302, and the execution timing is different between the background change production A and the pseudo continuous production, and in the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production, the movable body 32 is different from the first action. A different second operation is started, and after the fragment image 006SG302 is no longer displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the second operation of the movable body 32 ends (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 105).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect that display the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 can be executed at different timings, giving surprises to the players at various timings. Furthermore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302 after displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form 18-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may be possible to change and display it. In this case, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and the period from when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the background change effect A to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo continuous effect. The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form 18-3-1]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. , a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 102 (G), Fig. 105 (C)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first motion is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the production position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 105). See C). In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 122, in the pseudo continuous effect, the movable object falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be set to be longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
Further, as a performance different from the pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 122, it may be possible to execute a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body moves as a pseudo continuous effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area overlapping with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pseudo continuous effect from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This is an effect that starts the ascent of 32 and ends the ascent before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 19-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 128, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may also be possible to display the image. In this case, in the background change effect A, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and in the result notification performance, the glass plate The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form 19-3-1]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot) A white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 102 (G), Fig. 113 (Refer to (E)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the production position toward the origin position, and when the second operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 113(F)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
In addition, regarding the result notification effect shown in FIG. 128, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is the movable body rising period. Since it is longer than , it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the result notification performance.

[Form 19-4]
Further, as a performance different from the result notification performance shown in FIG. 128, it may be possible to execute a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to control the jackpot game state. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 125, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the strong development effect A is a effect that displays the fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. is also a short period. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the origin position above the image display device 5 after falling, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period ends. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful performance.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the first operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 109(B)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 125, the strong development performance A includes an early whiteout display period and a whiteout latter display period. Here, the initial whiteout display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may have substantially the same length, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the strong development performance.

[Form 20-3]
Furthermore, as a performance different from the strong development performance A shown in FIG. 125, it is also possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. good. In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area overlapping with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the strong development performance A performance from decreasing due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the background image can be visually recognized together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when not in use, are displayed with the first visibility, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is in a cracked state. The first background image 006SG081 when displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in background change effect B. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas whose priority is lower than that of the predetermined display layer when For example, the crack display area 006SG324) is displayed with the first visibility (see FIGS. 102(E), (F), and FIG. 104(C)).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack modes, can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack mode, even when the glass plate image 006SG301 is similarly displayed, it is suitably different. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
By being able to display the boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view of FIG. 104(C)), the background The performance effect of change performance B can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
It is possible to display the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that support variable display in the layer 9 image drawing area that has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 The corresponding image when is displayed in a cracked manner is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 104(C)). The corresponding image can also be suitably displayed.

[Form 21-4]
Further, for the background change effect B shown in FIG. 121, the second stage crack display period may be set to be longer than the first stage crack display period. By doing so, it is possible to make the glass plate image 006SG301 look different between the background change effect A and the background change effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the background change effect A and the dialogue preview effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Regarding the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, the visibility of the background image may be different between the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance is made longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack modes are provided in the dialogue preview performance (see FIGS. 102 and 101). The ratio of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type and the second crack mode is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type and the second crack mode is displayed. may be set to be high. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the speech preview performance, and even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the interest of the game. can be increased.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type in the second crack mode is displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type in the second crack mode is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type is displayed below the predetermined display layer. The visibility of the background image is different (see FIGS. 102 and 101). By doing so, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form 22-3]
It is preferable that the whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance. (For example, see FIGS. 102 and 101). By doing so, the display patterns of the white-out images 006SG303 can be made different and more interesting.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 can display corresponding images (for example, first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103) that are compatible with variable display in the special display layer (for example, layer 9 image drawing area). , the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer (for example, layer 9-1 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the special display layer, and a second predetermined display that has a lower priority than the special display layer. Special information regarding variable display in a special display layer (for example, layer 10 image drawing area) that can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a layer (for example, layer 4 image drawing area) and has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and the 2 When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on a predetermined display layer, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when the background change effect A is executed, the change effect is not executed and the background change effect B is executed. It is possible to perform a change effect when the user is in a situation where the user is not aware of the changes (see FIG. 148).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B can be executed at different timings, which makes it possible to surprise the player at various times. Even if the image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, so suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change production is a production in which the character image 006SG305 is displayed and the display mode of the corresponding image is changed by the character image 006SG305 performing an action that acts on the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 has a higher priority than a predetermined display layer. can be displayed in a lower display layer (for example, layer 3 image drawing area) (see FIG. 148). By doing so, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background changing effect B to the minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
By being able to display a change emphasis image (for example, effect image 006SG330) in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 148), The changing effect can be suitably executed even while the background changing effect B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The display modes are different between the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A suggests that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be executed. The display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A. (See Figures 102, 149, and 150).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that surprises can be given to the player at various timings, and furthermore, the background change effect A The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is different between the strong development performance A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A and the subsequent performance can be increased, so the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed. , the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the first special performance is executed, and the suggestion mode is the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed, and the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed. (See FIGS. 149, 150, and 151). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment images 006SG302 (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode This is displayed more often than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggested mode (see FIG. 151). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can perform a rotational movement, and in the strong development effect A, it is preferable that the amount of rotational movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode (Fig. 151 reference). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development effect A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in a second predetermined part, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part. In the part, a single fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 150). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 25]
Further, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 127 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, the effect can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the white-out image 006SG303, and during the operation promotion effect execution period before the cut-in effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the cut-in effect. (and the fragment image 006SG302) are not visible for a period longer than the initial white-out display period, so the operation promotion effect creates a reserve for the crack effect, and the fragment image display period creates a sense of speed. It is possible to achieve a unique cracking pattern.

[Form 26]
Further, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 127 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, it is an effect that can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation promotion effect execution period. By doing so, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form 27]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In presentation A, strong development presentation B, cut-in presentation, and result notification presentation, at least a portion of the display period of white-out image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of white-out image 006SG303 is the fragment image. The period is shorter than the display period. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a latter whiteout display period. Note that the latter half of the whiteout display period may be longer than the first half of the whiteout display period. By doing this, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is whiter than the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents image 006SG303 from being emphasized.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of glass plate image 006SG301, starts to break or the display has just started. The fragment image 006SG302 is hidden from view from the player. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 29]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 in the whiteout display early period is displayed. The fragment image 006SG302, which has just begun to crack or display, is hidden from the player's view, and the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in the latter period of the white-out display when the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is increased. It is possible. Therefore, in the latter period of whiteout display, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which is moved and displayed after a sufficient period of time has elapsed from the start of display.

[Form 30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 124, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 120 and 124, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the gaming state is a normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be performed when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 32]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to emit light using the light emission data table for cracking performance over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. From the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so the display is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. Light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks can be suitably performed.

[Form 33]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least in part, and the speakers 8L and 8R are in the whiteout state. Since the crack effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is output from the display start timing of the image 006SG303, the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern and when it is executed in the second pattern, the sound corresponding to the breaking effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) The difference may be whether or not the sound produced by the user is output. By doing this, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack effect.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, if it is possible to actually execute the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern in the second pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled to a jackpot game state as the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern. A sound may be output depending on the situation. By doing so, it is possible to provide patterns of cracking effects that give different impressions depending on the condition.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production pattern for the cracking production in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern, the breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301. On the other hand, when the breaking effect is executed in the second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the images are displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of the broken image 006SG302. The crack effect sound may not be output. By doing so, it is possible to provide crack patterns with different impressions.

[Form 37]
Shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the fragment image is output. When 006SG302 is displayed, the effect sound (crack effect sound) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a louder volume than the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, a contrast is created between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the crack pattern is impressed.

[Form 38]
As shown in FIG. 145, as a cracking effect in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the character voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the displayed character. When output is enabled and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a crack effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing this, a sharp contrast is created between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form 39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). value (for example, "30%"), the operating speeds of the first size fragment image 006SG302 and the second size fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different; The second pattern has a variation amount of 0 (for example, "0%"), so that the third size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern The operating speed is the same as that of 006SG302 (see FIGS. 130 and 131).

By doing this, the first pattern will be affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in a cracking pattern that looks realistic. It can be used when you want to show movement, and the second pattern is affected by the animation regardless of the size, as all the objects fly in the same way and fall in the same way, so you can choose an appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. You can choose.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and the display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (for example, a crack pattern). There are patterns D to F), and the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs depending on the setting of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved.

[Form 41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). , the direction of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a moving manner differs due to the different gravity direction settings (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and improve the interest.

[Form 42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern B), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern C). For crack pattern B and crack pattern C, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A and "5" for crack pattern B. 3'', and the crack pattern C is different from ``7'' (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern F), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) have the same first parameter of "gravity" as "0" and crack pattern F and crack pattern G. The second parameter of " is "3" for cracking pattern E and "5" for cracking pattern F, and cracking pattern F (second pattern) and cracking pattern G (third pattern) are The first parameter is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5" (see FIGS. 130 and 131). In this way, each pattern has a common part with respect to the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns for the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302), and the crack image according to the first pattern is usually The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time saving state, a variable probability state), and the cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. , the type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, and before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. , it is preferable that the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer differs after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (for example, see FIGS. 102 and 103). . By doing so, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when using the crack patterns A to G in the normal state and when using the crack patterns A to G in the special state.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is a effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode, and the image display device 5 displays a normal state and the normal state. In special states (for example, time saving state, variable probability state) that are more advantageous than the above, an effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed when the broken image is displayed in the first mode, and the broken image is displayed in the first mode. The effect image is hidden at a timing before it is displayed in the second mode (for example, see FIGS. 102 and 103). By doing so, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the cracking effect of the first pattern can be executed in a normal state, and the breaking effect of the second pattern can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the two patterns of cracking effects may be displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Furthermore, the speed of movement may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of cracking effect. By doing this, the performance effect during the time saving state or the variable probability state can be enhanced by using a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time saving state or the variable probability state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the first pattern of cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, the second pattern of breaking effect can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state, and when the first pattern of breaking effect is executed, The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be different depending on when the second pattern of cracking effect is executed. By doing this, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled is different depending on the crack pattern, so that the crack pattern can draw more attention.

[Form 48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially Overlapping, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a mode in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer is This is a transparent mode that can be recognized (see FIG. 151). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially The first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 have different display modes, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302. long (see Figure 151). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, is better than the second display area over which the movable body 32 overlaps. The amount of display is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the display area L2 (see FIG. 151). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is a period in which the movable body 32 overlaps from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap. The second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 moves from the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. It is displayed in a moving manner (see FIG. 151). By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not go into the area where the movable body 32 overlaps makes it possible to recognize that it is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps is prepared. By doing so, it is possible to provide a dynamic performance.

[Form 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least partially, and even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display screen, the fragment image 006SG302 continues. (See Figure 151). By doing so, while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A), and The type of fragment image 006SG302 takes a shorter period of time to disappear from the display screen than the first type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIGS. 106 and 107). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before one type of cracked image is displayed and after the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern. are different, and a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern. The types of background images displayed are different (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 106 to 108). By doing this, the specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common in the plurality of crack patterns, so that the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form 55]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. , when displaying a broken image using the first pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a predetermined image is displayed after displaying the first type of broken image 006SG302. When the effect image is hidden at the timing and the broken image is displayed using the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second type of broken image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 106 to 108). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 56]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the second type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305. The fragment image 006SG302 of the first type is displayed in such a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is Over the display period of the type of fragment image 006SG302, it is displayed in a manner that it moves without a change in speed (see FIGS. 106, 107, 102, and 103). By doing so, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, thereby increasing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot state is different depending on when the image is displayed and when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern (see FIGS. 102, 103, 106, and 107). By doing so, expectations for the character image 006SG305 are increased, and interest is increased by drawing attention to the type of crack pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the embodiment described above, the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the first half of the whiteout display period of each effect is all constant (first continuous crack effect, second continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A). , background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, V1 for result notification performance, V0 for strong development performance B and cut-in performance), but this The invention is not limited to this, and as a first modified example, these first continuous cracking effects, second continuous breaking effects, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, and reach suggestion effect are included. , weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. The advancing speed (display speed) in the vertical direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction), and in the direction toward the player (also referred to as the Z-axis direction) may be different.
The degree may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 141(A), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the result notification effect is a fragment image 006SG302A, Fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed of 0 in the axial direction, a speed of Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 speed in the Z-axis direction, 0 speed in the X-axis direction, 0 speed in the Y-axis direction, In addition to the fragment image 006SG302C that advances in the Z-axis direction at a speed Vz1, the fragment image 006SG302 that advances in two directions among these X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that advances in three directions. It may have a fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect has a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction and a speed of Vx2 in the Y-axis direction. Fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction, a speed of 0 towards the X-axis direction, a speed of Vy2 towards the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction In addition to the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C that moves at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, these images in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction Among the axial directions, the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in two directions, and the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in three directions.

Note that since moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in an enlarged manner, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as an enlarged display speed.

Here, in each production, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that advances only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that advances only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that advances only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 141 (C) In this modification example 1, unlike the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C is only enlarged and displayed toward the player. It is set longer than image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, by displaying the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A ends when the fragment image 006SG302B is displayed. Since the three-dimensional effect can be continued even after the splitting, the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141(D), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. , the result notification performance is the performance group X, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, and the cut-in performance is the performance group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the cracking performance of these performance group X and the cracking performance of the performance group Y. Comparing the displayed fragment image 006SG302C, in this modification 1, the traveling speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the presentation group The fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group Y is set to have a longer period from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group X, for example, by setting the display speed to be high (Vz1>Vz2). Therefore, in the present modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification. By being able to execute the background change performance A and the strong development performance B at different timings, it is possible to make the player pay attention to these performances at various timings, thereby giving surprise to the player. , since the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to be hidden is different between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, the same broken effect is executed to display the fragment image 006SG302. Even in the case of a presentation, it is possible to give suitably different impressions to the player depending on the presentation, so that the interest in the game can be increased.

In particular, in this modification example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to require a longer period of time for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear than the effects included in effect group X. When the cracking effect is executed as the included effect, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when the breaking effect is executed as the effect included in the effect group X.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed (enlarged) toward the player as the fragment image 006SG302 of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is provided, but the present invention is directed to this. However, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed toward the player (enlarged display) changes as it is enlarged and displayed from the display start timing to the display end timing. You can also do this. By doing so, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , Comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. , as shown in FIG. 141(C), the fragment image 006SG302C is set to have a longer period from display start to display end than the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B. The period from the start of display to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific production (for example, a cut-in production) is not limited to a predetermined production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production) that is different from the specific production. The period may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302A, B that move only in the X-axis direction and Y-axis direction in the presentation). By doing this, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is made different between the specific performance and the predetermined performance (in the above example, the cut-in performance and the pseudo continuous performance), and the interest of these specific performance and predetermined performance is increased. can be increased.

In addition, in the embodiment and the present modification 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by being moved and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect or background change effect A), all the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Regarding the fragment image 006SG302 that is hidden by completely moving towards the target and displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed on the image display device 5. While the fragment image 006SG302 may be hidden by being completely moved outside the area, other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while being moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to make the display modes of the fragment image 006SG302 different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest of the specific performance and the predetermined performance.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as each crack effect are displayed moving in multiple directions such as the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the first continuous crack effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second continuous crack effect. . By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed as a result of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken as the breaking effect of each effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each The number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the whiteout display early period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A has a length L1, and is a period that is continuous with the whiteout display early period, The latter period of white-out display in which the white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the first period of white-out display is displayed has a length L2 (L2>L1).

In addition, the fragment image display period is set to a length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the total period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period. It consists of a first fragment image display period and a second fragment image display period that is continuous with the first fragment image display period and has a length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2).

Here, as shown in FIG. 142(B), in the second fragment image display period, more fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than in the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the game interest of the cracking effect. Can be done. Furthermore, in this modification example 2, in the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early white-out display period; In the period that overlaps with the whiteout display period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is equal to the total period of the whiteout display early period and the whiteout display latter period. Since the length is longer than the length (L1+L2), during the first half of the white-out display period, by making the fragmented image 006SG302 invisible to the player, the player may feel uncomfortable with the cracking effect due to the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, it is possible to prevent the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragmentation image 006SG302 in the latter half of the whiteout display period, thereby preventing the game enjoyment of the cracking effect from decreasing. There is.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the performance and result notification effect has transparency, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the pseudo continuous effect and the weak development effect does not have transparency. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, and a reach effect. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all have transparency, or all of them may be transparent. It does not have to have a gender.

(Modification 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 143 as a third modification, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effects of , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect changes as the effect progresses (in this modification example 3) If so, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is 0 at the display timing of the fragment image 006SG302, T1 (T1>0) at the end timing of the whiteout display period, and T2 (T2>T1) at the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. , T3 (T3>T2) may be set at the timing at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends.By doing this, for example, immediately before the timing at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5. When sufficiently scattered over the display area, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In particular, in this modification example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Since the image can be easily recognized through the image 006SG302, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the image displayed as a result of the cracking performance being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in the third modification, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an example in which the transmittance increases as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may decrease as the effect progresses.

(Modification 4)
Furthermore, in modification example 3, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, As the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 144(A) and 144(B) as a fourth modification, the effects to be executed include a first continuous breaking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, Fragment image 006SG302 depending on whether it is background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different, or even if the effect is the same, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different depending on the game state (in FIG. 144, the background change effect A and the weak development effect (Illustrating the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 in and).

As shown in FIG. 144, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts as a crack effect, the whiteout display period ends. This makes the fragment image 006SG302 visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the weak development effect have different transmittances when they are visible to the player. Therefore, even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, it is possible to create a difference in the content of the effect. Therefore, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. It is possible to enhance the production effect between when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production of the weak development production.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144, a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in a normal state, and a weak development effect when executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. Even when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect of , the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect as the background change effect A when executed in the time saving state or the variable probability state. When the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as a weak development effect when executed, the transmittance in the state where it can be seen by the player is different, so in both cases, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed as a breaking effect. Even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, it is possible to make a difference in the effect content even if there is a difference in the effect. It is possible to enhance the production effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production in the development production.

(Modification 5)
In addition, in the embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, a breaking effect is executed as a effect within these background change effect A or reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, a voice corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may also be output. By doing so, it is possible to give contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 145 as modification example 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, the output of the character voice is The character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol1 in the example of FIG. 145) so that at least a portion of the period and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this modification 5, as shown in FIG. 145, the crack effect sound that is output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed has a louder volume than the crack sound that is output when the crack is displayed. (Vol2 in the example of FIG. 145) may be output. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, the crack effect can be added as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. The player can get an impression that the performance is executed, that is, that the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance are executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of the cracking performance.

(Modification 6)
In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display. Furthermore, the number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different depending on which of the effects is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 146 as modification example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the breaking effect of the dialogue preview effect rotates R three times from the start of display to the end of display. However, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A is larger than R3 from the start of display to the end of display. Fragment image 006SG302, which is rotated a small number of times R2 (R3>2) and displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, rotates fewer times than R2 from the start of display to the end of display. It is sufficient to rotate R1 (R2>R1) times.

In this way, in this modification 6, even if the timings that can be executed during variable display are different, by having the effect in which the number of rotations from the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display is the same, The combination of the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, the strong Like the combination of development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the relevance within each combination of performances increases, so the performance effect within the combination of these performances can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, in this modification 6, the number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which effect is the cracking effect, and in particular, for example, the pseudo continuous effect The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect has a higher number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the cut-in effect, so the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are Cracks performed as production, dialogue preview production, background change production A, background change production B, pseudo-continuation production, reach suggestion production, weak development production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, result notification production Variations in presentation can be increased, and the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modification example 6, the first consecutive cracking performance, the second consecutive cracking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, and the strong development performance A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is displayed in rotation has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the rotation of the fragment image 006SG302. When these fragment images 006SG302 reach the first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, and when these fragment images 006SG302 reach the second rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. At least a portion of the background image may be made invisible. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when these fragment images 006SG302 are displayed. Furthermore, in the case where the presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302 as described above, instead of rotating all the fragment images 006SG302 synchronously, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 are rotated. Image 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle, part of the other fragment image 006SG302 has the rotation angle 2, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302. be able to.

(Modification 7)
Further, as the pseudo-continuous effect in the above embodiment, a form in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed according to the operation of the movable body 32 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 147(A) as a seventh modification, as a pseudo continuous effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the crack may be displayed as a crack display period after a preliminary operation period in which the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 147(B), by configuring the crack display period into a crack pre-stage display period and a crack post-stage display period as in the background change effect A of the embodiment, the crack can be displayed in two stages. The cracking effect may be executed after being displayed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 147(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the embodiment. By doing so, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second-stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to increase the effect patterns until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displayed.

Furthermore, in this modification example 7, like the background change effect A in the embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's action and the movement of the movable body 32 operate. In the example shown in FIG. It is also possible to create an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a pre-stage operation period in which the action of 1 and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is composed of a crack-pre-stage display period and a crack-post-stage display period, and the length of the crack-front stage display period in the reach-suggestion performance is set to the background change performance A of the embodiment. The period may be different from the pre-crack display period. By doing so, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displayed.

(Modification 8)
In the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are placed in the layer 4 image drawing area and the layer 5 image drawing area below the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. Although the display form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the active display area 5F and It may be possible to display it not only in the layer 4 image drawing area below the special figure pending storage display area 5U, but also in the layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modification example 8, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A1) to (A5), in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is placed in a layer higher than the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. It can be displayed in the image drawing area. In addition, in response to the kicking motion of the character image 006SG305 toward the front, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After being displayed in the previous stage mode (see FIG. 148 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to the crack mode, a part of the crack is displayed in the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. They can be displayed in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 148 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed in such a way that it overlaps the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 are displayed. In this case, the visibility of the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 148 (B1) to (B5), in the background change effect B, as explained in the embodiment above, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 are displayed in the active display area 5F and on special figure hold. It can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the storage display area 5U. In addition, in response to the action of character image 006SG305 appearing at the upper right of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of glass plate image 006SG301 (Fig. 148 (B1 ), two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed at the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324 in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305 to start descending. The appearance of cracks changes stepwise (see FIG. 148 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area that is lower than the active display area 5F and special figure reservation storage display area 5U, if the crack grows and the active display area 5F and special figure reservation Even if it is displayed so as to cover the storage display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

Furthermore, even when the character image 006SG305 is moved and displayed across the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, the character image 006SG305 is superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. It may be possible to display the effect image 006SG330 in a layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U without displaying it (see FIG. 148 (B3)). Thereafter, an active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 148 (B4)).

In this way, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the background change effect A that may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U is an active change effect ( By overlapping the execution period with the effect production by the changing character), the execution of the active change production that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked mode, In background change effect B that does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U, by making it possible to execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, the crack precursor image can be similarly displayed. Even if the effect is displayed, since the display layer and the presence or absence of the active change effect are different, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game. Note that the target of the change effect may be the first pending display 006SG101 or the second pending display.

In addition, in background change effect A, part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, thereby improving the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. However, if the display mode of the pending display or active display changes in such a situation, it will be difficult to tell whether the change is due to the change effect or the crack mode, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is preferable that the changing effect can be executed in the background changing effect B in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U does not deteriorate even if it becomes a crack mode.

Further, in this modification example 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in the background change effect A, execution of the active change effect is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack effect is executed and the broken image 006SG302 After the whiteout image 006SG303 is scattered and the whiteout image 006SG303 is hidden, the active change effect can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of variation or during reach). Furthermore, the active change effect may be performed in a simplified manner (for example, in a manner in which the changing character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing shown in FIG. 148 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display becomes difficult to see due to the break effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the break effect and the change effect.

(Modification 9)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that it will develop into the strong S reach effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the performance are fragment images 006SG342M in a suggestive manner suggesting that any one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different expectations will be executed; 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc. may be included.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 149(A) to (F), the cracking effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. Before being hidden, a fragment image 006SG342M that suggests that strong S reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed, and a fragment image 006SG342J that suggests that strong S reach effect J will be executed, A fragment image 006SG342N suggesting that the strong S reach effect N will be executed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see FIG. 149(G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, only one fragment image 006SG342M is displayed while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden, and if multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed, the strong S It is announced that reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed (see FIGS. 150 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and other fragment images 006SG342M are displayed while the single fragment image 006SG342J is displayed. , 006SG342N is hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it is announced that the strong S reach effect J will be executed (see FIGS. 150 (B1) and (B2)), and the fragment images If the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden while 006SG342N is displayed as a single image, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it will be announced that the strong S reach effect N will be executed ( (See FIGS. 150 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the relationship between the fragment image in the strong development effect A and the subsequent strong S reach effect, so it is also suitable even if the effect displays the fragment image 006SG302. It is possible to give a different impression to the player and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification, the type of strong S reach effect to be executed is indicated by the non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N that display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach effects. However, the suggestion mode is not limited to the above one, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image has a mode that allows the type of strong S reach effect to be executed. It may be a fragment image displaying related information such as a reach title name or a background image that can identify the type of production.

Furthermore, if one of the plurality of fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N is displayed while the others are hidden, it is suggested that the type of fragmentation image 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N has been determined to be executed Any one of them may be suggested by displaying it in a large size, displaying it in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Further, the strong S reach effect may be executed with two or more fragment images finally displayed.

(Modification 10)
Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas. It may be possible to display it.

For example, in this modification 10, as shown in FIG. 151, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on layer 5-1 in a transparent manner. The small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the image drawing area in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. Further, in this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a crack precursor image is displayed in each of the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the crack timing. Furthermore, as explained in modification example 9, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect drawn. It is said to be a mode.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area is This is a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area that is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area can be recognized. In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 151(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are a first display that is not superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the production position. It is composed of an area L1 and a second display area L2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the production position, the amount of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. . By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 overlaps the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, any first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving from the first display area L1 to the second display area L2, while the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 Any second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes it clear that it is broken, while the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 is prepared, creating a lively effect. can be provided.

Further, in the embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 imitating a glass plate is applied as an example of the crack precursor image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A crack precursor image imitating an object other than glass may also be applied. Further, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Further, the crack precursor image may be displayed in a plurality of layered image drawing areas so that crack effects can be produced individually.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of the fragment image, a form in which a glass fragment image 006SG302 imitating a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is a replacement for the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image, can be displayed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed. The broken fragment image may be displayed in part. Further, although the fragment image is displayed in a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed in a lower display layer than the crack precursor image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking patterns A to G are set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect is based on cracking patterns of types other than those described above. may be executable.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, an example was given in which a cracking effect can be executed during execution of an effect such as a preview effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The breaking effect may be performed independently and separately from other effects other than the breaking effect. In this case, by making the jackpot expectation different depending on the form of the cracking pattern, the breaking performance may be performed as one of the preview performances, or the performance stage, performance mode, and game state may be changed. It may also be performed as a change effect.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the crack effect, the crack starts when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear side to the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cracking may be started by applying some kind of impact (force) to a predetermined position of the crack precursor image from the front side. Further, the force may be applied to multiple locations on the crack precursor image at a predetermined timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the embodiment, depending on the type of preview effect, cracking may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a crack mode, or cracking may start suddenly without changing to a crack mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview effect, all crack effects include the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changing to a crack mode. Alternatively, cracking may start suddenly without all the cracking effects changing to the crack mode.

Further, in the embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the object image (such as a character), decorative pattern, and background image displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. The various images to be displayed may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the crack may be displayed in a way that makes it stand out by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the portion representing the crack.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the character image 006SG305 was mainly used as an example of the object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character type may be of a type other than the above. It's okay. Furthermore, instead of a character, it can be changed to a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, a target, etc. in various ways.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, the cracking effect is divided into cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the object image, cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the movable body 32, and cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the object image and the movable body 32. Although we have exemplified a case in which cracking starts regardless of the movement, and a certain form, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the cracking may be started in all effects depending on the movement of the movable body 32, or the cracking may be started in all effects regardless of the object image or the movement of the movable body 32. In addition, although the movable body 32 as a logo accessory is used as an example of the movable body, a board-side movable body provided elsewhere on the game board 2 may be applied, or a movable body provided on a board other than the game board 2 A frame-side movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied. Furthermore, cracking may be started according to the operation of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect is started, the whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image in a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is difficult to visually recognize in the period immediately after the start of the effect, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to make it difficult to visually recognize 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the crack effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is increased at the start of the cracking effect, that is, by displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a fade-in manner, the breaking effect can be started. It may be made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at this time.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and arranged to display the crack in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as an image of the actual crack (changes to the fragment image 006SG302) in the layer 5 image drawing area. Although the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area. In this case, a fragment image 006SG302 is drawn and placed as an image in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301A may not be drawn and placed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be displayed in a cracked manner. The transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the broken image. For example, the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A to be displayed in a cracked manner is made higher than the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked manner (glass plate image 006SG301 is made a non-transparent image). ), the timing at which a crack is displayed and the timing at which a crack effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner in the layer 4 image drawing area is hidden, the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked aspect in the layer 5 image drawing area is performed. Although the starting form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timings of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the cracked form and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to the cracked form overlap at least in part. It's okay.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner is illustrated as the crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image is The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301 may be an image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 as long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken.

In addition, in the embodiment, the character kicks the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 102), hammers (see FIG. 106), and punches (see FIG. 106) as the breaking effects of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. 108), etc., the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effects of background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect are illustrated. As a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301, in addition to or in place of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, the background change effect of this embodiment includes background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick, causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to break (it breaks due to the impact of the kick); In addition to background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action (see Figure 87), as described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword (the sword The background change effect C (broken by a slash) can be executed, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled can be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of effect patterns in which the glass plate 006SG301A breaks that can be executed as a breaking effect, and it is possible to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the crack effect as the result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be displayed instead of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301. The whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break. By doing so, it is possible to increase the sense of speed from when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and to provide a powerful and memorable breaking effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a crack effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode, the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode itself is broken. It may be displayed as follows. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so when the cracking effect is executed, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the game This can prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency may be displayed. In particular, if the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B, the display on the image display device 5 until immediately before the cracking effect is executed. A part of the background image displayed in the area may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance have been exemplified forms in which the cracking performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first continuous cracking performances and second continuous cracking performances are illustrated. , dialogue preview performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, cracking performance as a performance other than result notification performance may be executable. For example, a jackpot game state that is variable and has a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-probable variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game with a probability variable jackpot C in which the number of rounds is 2) At the timing after the player is notified that the game will be controlled in a variable state), or in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display, a jackpot game state that is highly advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game) A promotion effect that once again announces that the jackpot game state will be controlled in the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A (which is a jackpot with 10 rounds and the number of rounds is 10), or a promotion effect that announces that the jackpot game state will not be controlled because it is in a variable display. After that, a cracking effect may be executed as a revival effect to once again notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , When performing a cracking effect as a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the glass plate image are performed after the actions of the character and movable body 32, the display of cracks, etc. Although the form in which the cracking of 006SG301A is performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be performed by whiteout without the action of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks, etc. A case may be provided in which the image 006SG303 is displayed or the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the cracking effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) are targeted for cracking, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for these cracking effects, an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as a crack target (for example, the operation promotion image 006SG310 in the case of a cracking effect of a dialogue preview effect or a cut-in effect).

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the broken image 006SG302, Although at least a part of the background image is temporarily made invisible to the player, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed as an image between the image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the front side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be achieved by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIGS. 3 and 3). 4), the character may act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as an ordinary flat image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the strong development effect In the cracking effect, which is a performance that suggests that the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed due to the fact that it is executed like a cut-in production or a cut-in production, the broken image 006SG302 can be viewed stereoscopically. It may also be displayed as a 3D image. By doing this, when performing a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a breaking effect makes the player aware that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state. I can do it.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The fact that the performance itself is executed as such suggests that the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed, and the cracking performance in performances other than these strong development performances and cut-in performances. The moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the two. By doing this, for example, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of a strong development effect or a cut-in effect can be changed to the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, and the background change effect. A, Background change effect B, Pseudo continuous effect, Reach suggestion effect, Weak development effect, By setting the movement display speed slower than the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the result notification effect, strong development effect or cut-in When the performance is executed, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 allows the player to recognize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high.

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. As the cracking effects of the production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, while as the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production and the weak development production. , the form of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by itself being executed like a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, other effects can be realized. The presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 is determined by the cracking effect in the effect that suggests that the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when executing , and the breaking effect in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. It may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state, depending on whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect is transparent.

As mentioned above, the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
Display means;
The game control means is
Performing variable display of the specific identification information based on multiple types of variable display patterns,
controllable into a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed in the corresponding display area,
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches a pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, a moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved, and a preliminary operation display in which the decorative identification information is operated in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display are performed. It is possible to
performing the preliminary operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
Performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means,
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the control will be in the advantageous state;
The display means is capable of displaying a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding the variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays the crack precursor image and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when the crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in the predetermined performance. can be,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed. Unlike,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to the present invention, when the variable display of specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and while the switching display is being performed, the decorative identification information is scrolled. By performing a preliminary operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from scroll display before starting display, the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the preliminary operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can increase interest. Further, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, a common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, by being able to perform a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect that displays a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image at different timings, players can Furthermore, since the type of background image is different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, it is possible to create a surprise in the same effect in which the fragment image is displayed. It is possible to give a suitably different impression even when playing the game, thereby increasing the interest in the game. That is, the display screen is likened to glass, and after displaying a crack (glass plate as a crack precursor image) on the display screen, the production effect is enhanced in a production in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed as if the display screen had been broken. You can increase your interest. As described above, the present invention can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display of the decorative identification information and the pending display in an unnatural manner, and can attract the player's interest from the start to the end of the variable display. , it can improve the interest of playing games. Therefore, it has high marketability.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

In addition, in the above embodiment, by allowing the game ball to enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole or the general winning hole. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball becomes easier to enter the winning hole than in the normal state, and it becomes easier to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc. If the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the time saving state or the variable probability state may be set as an advantageous state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
Display means;
The game control means is
Performing variable display of the specific identification information based on multiple types of variable display patterns,
controllable into a normal state and a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than in the normal state;
The performance control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed in the corresponding display area,
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches a pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, a moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved, and a preliminary operation display in which the decorative identification information is operated in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display are performed. It is possible to
performing the preliminary operation display while performing the switching display in the normal state;
Performing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means,
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. and
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the control will be in the advantageous state;
The display means is capable of displaying a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding the variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays the crack precursor image and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when the crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in the predetermined performance. can be,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed. Unlike,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images